1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children no
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_typewriter_osf false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format default
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command makeindex
81 \float_placement class
82 \float_alignment class
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 1
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 1
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 1
110 \use_package stmaryrd 1
111 \use_package undertilde 1
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
123 \notefontcolor #0000ff
140 \paragraph_separation skip
143 \math_numbering_side default
144 \quotes_style english
148 \paperpagestyle default
150 \tracking_changes true
151 \output_changes false
153 \postpone_fragile_content false
157 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
158 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
159 \author -584632292 "Richard Kimberly Heck"
160 \author -563046850 "Jean-Marc LASGOUTTES"
161 \author -131811572 "Yuriy Skalko"
163 \author 5863344 "Enrico Forestieri"
164 \author 1675569489 "Stephan Witt"
175 by the \SpecialChar LyX
180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
182 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
183 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
184 Documentation mailing list:
185 \begin_inset CommandInset href
187 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
199 \begin_inset Newline newline
203 \begin_inset Newline newline
207 \begin_inset Note Note
210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
211 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
212 \begin_inset Newline newline
217 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
225 \begin_layout Standard
226 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
227 LatexCommand tableofcontents
234 \begin_layout Chapter
238 \begin_layout Section
239 What is \SpecialChar LyX
243 \begin_layout Standard
245 is a document preparation system.
246 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
247 scripts, publishable books, business
248 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
249 It is unlike most other
250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
257 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
259 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
272 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
275 pt type, left justified, 5
276 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
285 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
289 \begin_layout Standard
290 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
295 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
299 \begin_layout Standard
304 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
305 's philosophy: most importantly,
306 the format of all of the manuals.
307 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
308 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
314 manual describes that, too.
317 \begin_layout Section
322 \begin_layout Standard
323 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
324 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
326 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
327 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
331 \begin_layout Standard
332 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
333 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
334 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
336 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
337 only a vertical scrollbar.
338 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
339 The first case is large images.
340 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
341 image and use the option
352 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
355 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
356 this doesn't work for equations yet.
359 \begin_layout Standard
360 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
361 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
367 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
369 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
376 \begin_layout Section
380 \begin_layout Standard
381 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
383 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
385 Just select the manual you want to read from the
392 \begin_layout Section
393 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
395 \begin_inset CommandInset label
397 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
404 \begin_layout Standard
405 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
406 can be configured via the menu
408 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
412 \begin_inset Index idx
415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
422 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
424 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
425 packages are available.
426 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
428 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
430 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
431 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
435 \begin_inset space \space{}
438 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
439 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
441 To force \SpecialChar LyX
442 to re-inspect your system, you should use
444 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
448 \begin_inset Index idx
451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
452 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
458 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
459 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
462 \begin_layout Section
465 \begin_inset CommandInset label
467 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
474 \begin_layout Standard
475 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
476 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
477 installed, but you will not be
478 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
479 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
480 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
481 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
482 document can always be output as plain text
486 \begin_layout Standard
487 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
488 or DocBook classes or packages.
489 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
490 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
493 \begin_layout Standard
494 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
495 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
496 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
499 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
507 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
508 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
511 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
515 \begin_inset Index idx
518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
519 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
527 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
534 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
538 \begin_layout Chapter
539 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
543 \begin_layout Section
544 Basic File Operations
545 \begin_inset Index idx
548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
557 \begin_layout Standard
562 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
563 in addition to some more advanced operations:
566 \begin_layout Itemize
588 \begin_layout Itemize
604 arg "buffer-new-template"
610 \begin_layout Itemize
632 \begin_layout Itemize
640 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
644 \begin_layout Itemize
646 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
658 \begin_layout Itemize
670 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
674 \begin_layout Itemize
676 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
684 \begin_layout Itemize
706 \begin_layout Itemize
718 arg "buffer-write-as"
722 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
726 \begin_layout Itemize
728 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
744 \begin_layout Itemize
758 \begin_layout Itemize
772 \begin_layout Standard
773 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
774 a few minor differences.
777 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
788 command lists the available templates.
789 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
790 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
791 and possibly propose text fragments
793 for the document, features
794 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
797 you would otherwise need to
798 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
800 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
804 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
808 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
816 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
822 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
823 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a
827 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
835 \begin_layout Standard
836 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
845 \begin_inset Quotes eld
849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
861 \begin_inset Quotes eld
865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
868 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
869 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
870 is just that — a big, blank space.
878 \begin_layout Standard
899 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
904 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
907 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
925 will reload the document from disk.
926 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
927 and want to restore it to the last save.
936 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
937 them as your changes.
940 \begin_layout Section
941 Basic Editing Features
942 \begin_inset Index idx
945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
952 \begin_inset CommandInset label
954 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
961 \begin_layout Standard
962 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
963 can perform cut and paste operations
964 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
965 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
966 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
967 editing features and how to access
969 We will start with cut and paste.
972 \begin_layout Standard
973 As you might expect, the
977 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
978 various other editing features.
979 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
983 \begin_layout Itemize
989 \begin_inset Index idx
992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1021 \begin_layout Itemize
1027 \begin_inset Index idx
1030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1059 \begin_layout Itemize
1065 \begin_inset Index idx
1068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1093 \begin_layout Itemize
1097 \begin_inset space ~
1103 \begin_layout Itemize
1107 \begin_inset space ~
1113 \begin_layout Itemize
1117 \begin_inset space ~
1121 \begin_inset space ~
1127 \begin_inset Index idx
1130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1139 \begin_inset Index idx
1142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1157 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1167 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1173 \begin_layout Standard
1174 The first three are self-explanatory.
1175 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1176 and other programs by
1197 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1198 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1203 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1204 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1205 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1206 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1207 into individual cells.
1211 \begin_inset space ~
1216 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1217 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1221 \begin_layout Standard
1225 \begin_inset space ~
1230 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1232 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1234 \begin_inset space ~
1241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1247 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1248 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1249 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1251 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1255 \begin_inset space \space{}
1258 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1259 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1262 \begin_inset space ~
1265 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1267 \begin_inset space ~
1271 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1275 \begin_inset space ~
1284 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1285 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1287 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1291 \begin_inset space ~
1296 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1297 start a new paragraph.
1298 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1299 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1304 \begin_inset space ~
1307 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1309 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1313 \begin_inset space ~
1321 \begin_inset space ~
1324 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1327 paste from the primary selection.
1328 This is normally the currently selected text.
1331 \begin_layout Standard
1334 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1336 \begin_inset space ~
1340 \begin_inset space ~
1348 \begin_inset space ~
1352 \begin_inset space ~
1358 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1364 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1367 \begin_inset space ~
1376 \begin_inset space ~
1381 button to skip the current word.
1385 \begin_inset space ~
1390 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1394 \begin_inset space ~
1399 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1401 If the toggle is set, searching for
1402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1413 will not match the word
1414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1428 Match whole words only
1430 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1431 to only find complete words, e.
1432 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1461 offers also an advanced
1464 \begin_inset space ~
1468 \begin_inset space ~
1473 feature that is described in section
1474 \begin_inset space ~
1478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1480 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1487 \begin_layout Standard
1488 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1489 \begin_inset space \space{}
1493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1501 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1503 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1508 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1515 \begin_layout Standard
1519 arg "inset-select-all"
1522 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1523 When the cursor is inside an inset
1526 arg "inset-select-all"
1529 selects the content of the inset.
1533 arg "inset-select-all"
1536 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1541 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1544 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1548 \begin_layout Section
1550 \begin_inset Index idx
1553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1560 \begin_inset Index idx
1563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1570 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1572 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1579 \begin_layout Standard
1580 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1582 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1585 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1588 or the toolbar button
1594 to undo some mistake.
1595 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1597 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1600 or the toolbar button
1607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1614 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1615 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1618 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1621 \begin_layout Standard
1622 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1631 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1632 This is a consequence of the 100
1633 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1636 step undo limit mentioned above.
1639 \begin_layout Standard
1648 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1650 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1654 \begin_layout Section
1656 \begin_inset Index idx
1659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1668 \begin_layout Standard
1669 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1672 \begin_layout Enumerate
1677 \begin_layout Itemize
1682 once anywhere in the edit window.
1683 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1687 \begin_layout Enumerate
1692 \begin_layout Itemize
1699 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1702 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1705 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1706 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1709 \begin_layout Itemize
1710 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1713 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1720 \begin_layout Enumerate
1721 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1725 \begin_layout Standard
1726 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1727 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1731 \begin_layout Section
1733 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1735 name "sec:Navigating"
1740 \begin_inset Index idx
1743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1752 \begin_layout Standard
1754 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1757 \begin_layout Itemize
1762 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1763 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1766 \begin_layout Itemize
1767 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1769 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1771 \begin_inset space ~
1776 or by the toolbar button
1779 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1785 \begin_layout Itemize
1786 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1788 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1791 and use the same menu to return to them.
1792 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1795 \begin_layout Standard
1799 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1804 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1805 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1807 \begin_inset space ~
1812 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1813 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1814 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1815 your last editing position.
1818 \begin_layout Standard
1823 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1827 \begin_layout Subsection
1829 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1831 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1836 \begin_inset Index idx
1839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1840 Navigating ! Outline
1846 \begin_inset Index idx
1849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1858 \begin_layout Standard
1859 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1860 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1861 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1863 \begin_inset space ~
1867 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1869 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1873 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1874 \begin_inset space ~
1878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1880 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1885 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1889 \begin_layout Standard
1890 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1891 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1892 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1893 dialog and to modify the citation.
1896 \begin_layout Standard
1901 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1902 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1904 Labels and References
1906 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1908 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1915 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1918 \begin_layout Standard
1919 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1920 you further to control the display.
1925 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1926 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1932 option keeps it in the current view state.
1933 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1934 \begin_inset space ~
1937 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1938 \begin_inset space ~
1941 3, the subsections of sections
1942 \begin_inset space ~
1945 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1950 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1951 \begin_inset space ~
1955 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1965 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1968 \begin_layout Standard
1975 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1976 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1990 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1991 So, for example, you can move section
1992 \begin_inset space ~
1996 \begin_inset space ~
1999 2.4 or after section
2000 \begin_inset space ~
2005 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2018 (or the corresponding key bindings
2026 ) you can change the level of sections.
2027 So you can for example make section
2028 \begin_inset space ~
2032 \begin_inset space ~
2036 \begin_inset space ~
2042 \begin_layout Standard
2043 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
2044 section to copy, cut or delete it.
2047 \begin_layout Subsection
2048 Horizontal Scrolling
2049 \begin_inset Index idx
2052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2053 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
2061 \begin_layout Standard
2063 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
2065 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2069 \begin_inset space \space{}
2073 \begin_inset space ~
2076 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
2077 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
2078 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2082 \begin_layout Standard
2083 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2087 \begin_layout Itemize
2089 is used on a small tablet computer
2092 \begin_layout Itemize
2093 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2105 \begin_inset space ~
2118 \begin_layout Itemize
2119 Math constructs with long command names
2122 \begin_layout Standard
2123 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2124 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2126 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2127 windows so that table
2128 \begin_inset space ~
2132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2134 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2139 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2141 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2142 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2145 \begin_layout Standard
2146 \begin_inset Float table
2153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2154 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2157 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2159 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2163 Horizontal scrolling test.
2171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2173 \begin_inset Tabular
2174 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2175 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2176 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2177 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2178 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2220 \begin_layout Section
2221 Input/Word Completion
2222 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2224 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2229 \begin_inset Index idx
2232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2239 \begin_inset Index idx
2242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2273 \begin_layout Standard
2275 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2277 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2278 is used to propose completions.
2281 \begin_layout Standard
2282 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2285 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2290 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2297 \begin_inset space ~
2301 \begin_inset space ~
2306 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2310 \begin_inset space ~
2315 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2316 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2320 \begin_inset space ~
2326 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2327 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2328 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2329 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2332 \begin_layout Standard
2334 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2335 completions available.
2340 key to accept a proposed completion.
2341 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2342 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2343 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2350 \begin_layout Standard
2351 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2352 ing options for text.
2354 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340017
2356 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340019
2358 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340019
2361 he special math option
2365 enables characters to be composed.
2366 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2367 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2370 , you can then input the characters
2371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2382 to a formula to get it.
2383 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2384 of the math toolbar.
2385 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2389 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2390 's installation folder.
2392 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340086
2393 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2400 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340324
2405 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
2406 In the example above,
2411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2419 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2443 \begin_layout Section
2445 \begin_inset Index idx
2448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2455 \begin_inset Index idx
2458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2487 \begin_inset Index idx
2490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2521 \begin_layout Standard
2522 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2536 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2539 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2543 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2544 \begin_inset space ~
2548 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2550 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2557 \begin_layout Standard
2561 \begin_inset space ~
2569 \begin_inset space ~
2590 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2594 \begin_layout Labeling
2595 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2599 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2600 LatexCommand nomenclature
2602 description "Tabulator key"
2609 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2611 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2612 \begin_inset space ~
2616 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2618 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2623 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2625 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2629 , especially section
2630 \begin_inset space ~
2634 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2636 reference "subsec:Lists"
2642 If you are still confused, look in the
2647 \begin_inset Newline newline
2655 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2656 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2660 \begin_layout Labeling
2661 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2665 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2666 LatexCommand nomenclature
2668 description "Escape key"
2676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2683 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2684 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2687 \begin_layout Labeling
2688 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2694 \begin_inset space ~
2698 \begin_inset space ~
2705 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2706 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2710 \begin_layout Standard
2711 There are three modifier keys:
2714 \begin_layout Labeling
2715 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2733 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2734 LatexCommand nomenclature
2736 description "Control key"
2741 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2742 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2746 \begin_layout Itemize
2755 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2758 \begin_layout Itemize
2767 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2770 \begin_layout Itemize
2779 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2783 \begin_layout Labeling
2784 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2802 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2803 LatexCommand nomenclature
2805 description "Shift key"
2810 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2811 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2814 \begin_layout Labeling
2815 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2829 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2833 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2834 LatexCommand nomenclature
2836 description "Alt or Meta key"
2841 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2842 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2843 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2849 \begin_inset Newline newline
2852 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2854 menu accelerator keys
2857 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2858 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2862 \begin_layout Standard
2863 For example, the sequence
2864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2870 \begin_inset space ~
2874 \begin_inset space ~
2880 \begin_inset space ~
2888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2907 \begin_inset space ~
2913 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2923 \begin_layout Standard
2928 manual lists all other things bound to the
2936 \begin_layout Standard
2937 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2939 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2940 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2941 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2942 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2943 The \SpecialChar LyX
2944 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2945 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2946 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2948 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2949 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2964 followed by a capital
2971 \begin_layout Chapter
2974 \begin_inset Index idx
2977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2987 \begin_layout Section
2989 \begin_inset Index idx
2992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3001 \begin_layout Subsection
3005 \begin_layout Standard
3006 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
3007 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3008 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
3009 numbering schemes, and so on.
3010 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
3011 and format the title of your document differently.
3014 \begin_layout Standard
3019 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3020 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
3021 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3022 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
3023 picks one for you by default.
3024 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
3027 \begin_layout Subsection
3029 \begin_inset Index idx
3032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3039 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3041 name "sec:Document-Classes"
3048 \begin_layout Standard
3049 You can select a class using the
3051 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3052 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3056 \begin_inset Index idx
3059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3066 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
3070 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3074 \begin_layout Standard
3075 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
3080 \begin_layout Description
3081 Article for basic articles
3084 \begin_layout Description
3085 Report for basic reports
3088 \begin_layout Description
3089 Book for writing a book
3092 \begin_layout Description
3093 Letter for US-style letters
3096 \begin_layout Standard
3097 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
3098 only uses if you have installed
3099 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
3100 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
3101 distributions will include
3103 Here are some of the classes.
3104 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
3106 Special Document Classes
3115 \begin_layout Description
3116 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
3119 \begin_layout Description
3120 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
3124 \begin_layout Description
3125 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
3129 \begin_layout Description
3130 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
3131 Mathematical Society (AMS).
3132 There are three article layouts available.
3133 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
3134 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
3135 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
3136 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
3138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3141 sequential numbering
3142 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3145 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3146 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3147 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3148 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3151 \begin_layout Description
3152 Beamer Layout for presentations
3155 \begin_layout Description
3156 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3157 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3158 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3159 with \SpecialChar LyX
3163 \begin_layout Description
3164 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3167 \begin_layout Description
3169 \begin_inset space ~
3172 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3175 \begin_layout Description
3176 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3179 \begin_layout Description
3180 Foils Used to make transparencies
3183 \begin_layout Description
3184 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3185 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3186 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3187 with \SpecialChar LyX
3191 \begin_layout Description
3192 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3193 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3196 \begin_layout Description
3197 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3200 \begin_layout Description
3201 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3204 \begin_layout Description
3205 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3206 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3207 (Is used by this document.)
3210 \begin_layout Description
3211 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3214 \begin_layout Description
3215 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3218 \begin_layout Description
3223 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3224 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3226 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3230 \begin_layout Description
3231 Slides Used to make transparencies
3234 \begin_layout Description
3236 \begin_inset space ~
3239 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3240 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3243 \begin_layout Description
3244 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3247 \begin_layout Standard
3248 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3250 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3252 Special Document Classes
3259 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3260 of the document classes.
3263 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3267 \begin_layout Standard
3268 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3270 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3271 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3273 \begin_inset Index idx
3276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3293 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3294 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3296 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3299 \begin_layout Standard
3302 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3307 , are highly specialized.
3309 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3310 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3311 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3312 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3313 by some document class.
3314 There are just too many of them.
3315 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3318 \begin_layout Standard
3319 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3327 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3328 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3329 document class for a new file.
3331 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3334 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3341 manual for information on how to install them.
3342 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3348 \begin_layout Standard
3349 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3350 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3351 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3352 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3353 class files to be used for dissertation
3354 s submitted to those universities.
3355 The \SpecialChar LyX
3356 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3358 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3362 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3368 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3371 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3373 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3375 name "subsec:Modules"
3380 \begin_inset Index idx
3383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3392 \begin_layout Standard
3393 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3394 chosen document class.
3395 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3396 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3403 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3407 \begin_inset Index idx
3410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3417 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3421 \begin_layout Standard
3422 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3423 packages or file format converters that are not always
3424 installed by default.
3426 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3427 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3428 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3429 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3431 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3432 file without the missing prerequisites.
3433 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3434 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3437 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3441 \begin_inset Index idx
3444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3445 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3451 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3456 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3459 \begin_layout Standard
3460 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3468 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3470 will advise you about these things.
3478 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3480 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3482 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3487 \begin_inset Index idx
3490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3491 Document ! Local Layout
3499 \begin_layout Standard
3500 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3501 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3502 : They are intended to be used in
3503 a variety of different documents.
3504 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3505 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3506 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3507 need a specific inset or
3508 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
3510 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757388
3513 style only that one time.
3514 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3516 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3534 manual for information on how to use it.
3537 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3541 \begin_layout Standard
3542 Each class has a default set of options.
3543 Here's a quick table describing them:
3546 \begin_layout Standard
3547 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3553 \begin_layout Standard
3555 \begin_inset Tabular
3556 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3557 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3558 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3559 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3560 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3561 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3562 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4016 \begin_layout Standard
4017 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4023 \begin_layout Standard
4024 You're probably also wondering what
4025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4029 \begin_inset space ~
4033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4037 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
4038 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
4043 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
4048 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
4058 headings, there are also
4066 headings, and so on.
4067 We will describe these headings fully in section
4068 \begin_inset space ~
4072 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4074 reference "subsec:Headings"
4081 \begin_layout Subsection
4083 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4085 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
4090 \begin_inset Index idx
4093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4100 \begin_inset Index idx
4103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4112 \begin_layout Standard
4113 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
4115 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4122 \begin_inset space ~
4130 \begin_inset space ~
4135 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
4137 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
4138 doesn't support special options you want to
4139 use for your document.
4140 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
4141 -class and its options, you have to read
4145 \begin_layout Standard
4149 \begin_inset space ~
4156 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4162 \begin_inset space ~
4167 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4168 You can choose between the following five options:
4171 \begin_layout Labeling
4172 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4177 Use default page style of current class.
4180 \begin_layout Labeling
4181 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4186 No page numbers or headings.
4189 \begin_layout Labeling
4190 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4198 \begin_layout Labeling
4199 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4204 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4205 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4206 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4207 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4210 \begin_layout Labeling
4211 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4216 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4217 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4223 \begin_inset Index idx
4226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4234 How they are defined is explained in section
4235 \begin_inset space ~
4239 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4241 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4248 \begin_layout Standard
4249 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4250 \begin_inset space ~
4254 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4256 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4263 \begin_layout Subsection
4264 Paper Size and Orientation
4265 \begin_inset Index idx
4268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4269 Document ! Paper size
4275 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4277 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4284 \begin_layout Standard
4285 You can find the following options in the menu
4288 \begin_inset space ~
4295 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4299 \begin_inset Index idx
4302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4311 \begin_layout Labeling
4312 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4316 \begin_inset space ~
4321 What size paper to print on.
4326 \begin_layout Itemize
4332 \begin_layout Itemize
4338 \begin_layout Itemize
4344 \begin_layout Itemize
4350 \begin_layout Itemize
4353 US letter, US legal, US executive
4356 \begin_layout Itemize
4362 \begin_layout Itemize
4369 \begin_layout Labeling
4370 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4375 To choose whether to output as
4386 \begin_layout Labeling
4387 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4391 \begin_inset space ~
4396 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4397 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4400 \begin_layout Subsection
4402 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4404 name "subsec:Margins"
4409 \begin_inset Index idx
4412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4419 \begin_inset Index idx
4422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4431 \begin_layout Standard
4432 Paper margins are set in the menu
4434 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4438 \begin_inset Index idx
4441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4450 \begin_layout Standard
4451 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4452 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4453 the paper format and the font size into account.
4456 \begin_layout Subsection
4460 \begin_layout Standard
4461 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4467 That includes the paragraph environments.
4468 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4469 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4470 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4472 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4481 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4483 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4484 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4485 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4488 \begin_layout Section
4489 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4490 \begin_inset Index idx
4493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4494 Paragraph ! Indentation
4502 \begin_layout Subsection
4504 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4506 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4513 \begin_layout Standard
4514 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4515 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4518 \begin_layout Standard
4519 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4520 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4521 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4522 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4526 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4532 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4533 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4534 language than English.
4536 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4539 \begin_layout Standard
4540 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4541 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4542 into \SpecialChar LyX
4544 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4547 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4549 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4550 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4551 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4558 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4559 goes to produce a printable file.
4564 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4566 gives you the ability globally to change
4570 these pre-coded spacings.
4571 We will explain more later.
4574 \begin_layout Subsection
4575 Paragraph Separation
4576 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4578 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4583 \begin_inset Index idx
4586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4587 Paragraph ! Separation
4595 \begin_layout Standard
4603 \begin_inset space ~
4611 \begin_inset space ~
4618 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4622 \begin_inset Index idx
4625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4631 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4634 \begin_layout Subsection
4638 \begin_layout Standard
4639 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4642 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4644 \begin_inset space ~
4649 dialog and toggle the
4652 \begin_inset space ~
4657 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4660 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4664 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4665 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4669 \begin_layout Standard
4670 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4671 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4674 \begin_layout Subsection
4676 \begin_inset Index idx
4679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4680 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4688 \begin_layout Standard
4691 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4695 \begin_inset Index idx
4698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4707 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4711 \begin_inset space ~
4720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4721 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4727 \begin_inset Index idx
4730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4737 installed to use this feature.
4742 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4744 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4746 \begin_inset space ~
4751 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4752 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4755 \begin_layout Section
4756 Paragraph Environments
4757 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4759 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4764 \begin_inset Index idx
4767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4768 Paragraph ! Environments
4774 \begin_inset Index idx
4777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4778 Paragraph environments|(
4786 \begin_layout Subsection
4790 \begin_layout Standard
4791 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4794 \begin_layout Standard
4803 } \SpecialChar ldots
4813 \begin_inset Newline newline
4816 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4818 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4819 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4820 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4829 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4832 \begin_layout Standard
4833 A paragraph environment is simply a
4834 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4841 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4842 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4843 scheme, labels, and so on.
4844 Additionally, you can
4845 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4852 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4853 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4854 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4855 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4857 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4859 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4862 \begin_layout Standard
4863 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4864 \begin_inset Graphics
4865 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4871 at the left end of the toolbar.
4873 will change the environment of the
4877 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4878 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4879 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4883 \begin_layout Standard
4892 create a new paragraph using the
4896 paragraph environment.
4898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4905 because if you are in one of these environments:
4908 \begin_layout Itemize
4914 \begin_layout Itemize
4920 \begin_layout Itemize
4926 \begin_layout Itemize
4932 \begin_layout Itemize
4938 \begin_layout Itemize
4944 \begin_layout Itemize
4950 \begin_layout Standard
4952 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4956 , rather than resetting it to
4961 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4962 \begin_inset space ~
4966 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4968 reference "sec:Nesting"
4975 \begin_layout Subsection
4979 \begin_layout Standard
4980 The default paragraph environment is
4985 It creates a plain paragraph.
4987 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4988 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4989 this manual) are in the
4996 \begin_layout Standard
4997 You can nest a paragraph using the
5001 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
5009 \begin_layout Subsection
5011 \begin_inset Index idx
5014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5023 \begin_layout Standard
5024 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
5025 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
5027 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5034 for thanks or contact information.
5035 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5036 places all of this on a separate page
5037 along with today's date.
5038 For other types of documents, the title
5039 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5043 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5046 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
5050 \begin_layout Standard
5052 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
5066 Here's how you use them:
5069 \begin_layout Itemize
5070 Put the title of your document in the
5077 \begin_layout Itemize
5078 Put the author name in the
5085 \begin_layout Itemize
5086 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
5087 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
5093 Note that using this environment is optional.
5094 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5095 will automatically insert today's date.
5096 If you don't want a date, use the option
5098 Suppress default date on front page
5102 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5103 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
5105 \begin_inset space ~
5113 \begin_layout Standard
5114 You can use footnotes to insert
5115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5122 or contact information.
5125 \begin_layout Subsection
5127 \begin_inset Index idx
5130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5137 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5139 name "subsec:Headings"
5146 \begin_layout Standard
5147 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5149 takes care of the numbering for you.
5152 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5154 \begin_inset Index idx
5157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5158 Section headings ! Numbered
5166 \begin_layout Standard
5167 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5171 \begin_layout Enumerate
5177 \begin_layout Enumerate
5183 \begin_layout Enumerate
5189 \begin_layout Enumerate
5195 \begin_layout Enumerate
5201 \begin_layout Enumerate
5207 \begin_layout Enumerate
5213 \begin_layout Standard
5215 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5216 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5217 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5220 \begin_layout Standard
5221 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5222 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5223 You group the book into chapters.
5225 does a similar grouping:
5228 \begin_layout Itemize
5233 is divided into either
5244 \begin_layout Itemize
5256 \begin_layout Itemize
5268 \begin_layout Itemize
5280 \begin_layout Itemize
5292 \begin_layout Itemize
5304 \begin_layout Standard
5305 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5313 Not all document types use the
5317 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5322 is the top-level heading.
5330 \begin_layout Standard
5335 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5336 labels it with its number,
5337 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5339 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5345 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5351 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5353 \begin_inset Index idx
5356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5357 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5365 \begin_layout Standard
5366 The unnumbered section headings have a
5367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5374 at the end of their name.
5375 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5376 the table of contents, see section
5377 \begin_inset space ~
5381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5390 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5391 Changing the Numbering
5392 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5394 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5401 \begin_layout Standard
5402 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5403 in the Table of Contents.
5404 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5406 Just as certain classes start with
5420 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5430 This is something you can change.
5433 \begin_layout Standard
5436 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5440 \begin_inset Index idx
5443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5452 \begin_inset space ~
5456 \begin_inset space ~
5461 you will see two counters.
5466 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5467 numbers a section heading.
5468 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5472 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5473 Short Titles of Headings
5474 \begin_inset Index idx
5477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5478 Section headings ! Short titles
5484 \begin_inset Argument 1
5487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5494 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5496 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5503 \begin_layout Standard
5504 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5505 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5506 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5507 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5510 \begin_layout Standard
5512 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5513 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5514 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5515 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5518 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5520 \begin_inset space ~
5526 This will insert a box labeled
5527 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5531 \begin_inset space ~
5535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5538 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5539 This also works for captions inside floats.
5540 There can only be one short title per title.
5543 \begin_layout Standard
5544 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5547 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5551 \begin_layout Standard
5552 The following information applies to all section headings:
5555 \begin_layout Itemize
5556 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5559 \begin_layout Itemize
5560 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5563 \begin_layout Itemize
5564 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5567 \begin_layout Itemize
5568 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5571 \begin_layout Subsection
5575 \begin_layout Standard
5577 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5591 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5592 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5593 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5594 the text they contain.
5595 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5603 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5606 \begin_layout Standard
5607 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5616 when you start a new paragraph.
5617 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5621 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5622 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5623 have to change back to the
5627 environment yourself.
5630 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5632 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5639 \begin_inset Index idx
5642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5651 \begin_layout Standard
5652 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5653 time for the differences.
5662 are identical except for one difference:
5666 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5675 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5678 \begin_layout Standard
5679 Here's an example of the
5692 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5694 See – no indentation!
5698 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5699 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5700 the other paragraph.
5703 \begin_layout Standard
5704 Here's another example, this time in the
5711 \begin_layout Quotation
5717 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5718 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5719 the first line, then
5723 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5727 you were quoting other text.
5730 \begin_layout Quotation
5731 Here's a new paragraph.
5732 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5733 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5736 \begin_layout Standard
5737 As the examples show,
5741 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5742 They should put quotes in the
5747 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5751 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5754 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5756 \begin_inset Index idx
5759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5766 \begin_inset Index idx
5769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5776 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5785 \begin_layout Standard
5790 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5796 \begin_inset Newline newline
5799 Which I did not rehearse!
5803 It could be much worse.
5804 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5806 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5807 indented a bit more than the first.
5808 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5814 \begin_inset Newline newline
5817 And make things look fine
5818 \begin_inset Newline newline
5824 arg "newline-insert newline"
5830 \begin_layout Standard
5835 does not indent both margins.
5836 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5837 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5840 arg "newline-insert newline"
5846 \begin_layout Subsection
5848 \begin_inset Index idx
5851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5858 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5867 \begin_layout Standard
5869 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5879 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5880 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5889 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5890 lets you provide your own label.
5891 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5892 describing some general features of all four of them.
5895 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5899 \begin_layout Standard
5900 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5902 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5903 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5912 reset the environment to
5916 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5917 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5918 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5922 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5926 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5933 \begin_layout Standard
5934 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5935 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5936 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5938 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5939 you read all of section
5940 \begin_inset space ~
5944 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5946 reference "sec:Nesting"
5953 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5955 \begin_inset Index idx
5958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5965 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5974 \begin_layout Standard
5975 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5979 paragraph environment.
5980 It has the following properties:
5983 \begin_layout Itemize
5984 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5988 \begin_layout Itemize
5990 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5993 \begin_layout Itemize
5994 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5998 \begin_layout Itemize
5999 The items can have any length.
6001 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
6002 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
6009 \begin_layout Itemize
6014 environment inside another
6018 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
6022 \begin_layout Itemize
6023 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
6026 \begin_layout Itemize
6028 always shows the same symbol on screen.
6031 \begin_layout Itemize
6033 \begin_inset space ~
6037 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6039 reference "sec:Nesting"
6043 for a full explanation of nesting.
6047 \begin_layout Standard
6048 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
6057 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
6060 \begin_layout Standard
6061 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
6062 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
6065 \begin_layout Itemize
6066 The label for the first level
6070 is a large black dot, or bullet.
6074 \begin_layout Itemize
6075 The label for the second level is a dash.
6079 \begin_layout Itemize
6080 The label for the third is an asterisk.
6084 \begin_layout Itemize
6085 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
6089 \begin_layout Itemize
6090 Back out to the third level.
6094 \begin_layout Itemize
6095 Back to the second level.
6099 \begin_layout Itemize
6100 Back to the outermost level.
6103 \begin_layout Standard
6104 These are the default labels for an
6109 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
6111 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6114 dialog in the submenu
6119 \begin_inset Index idx
6122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6128 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
6132 \begin_layout Standard
6133 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
6134 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
6136 \begin_inset space ~
6140 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6142 reference "sec:Nesting"
6149 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6151 \begin_inset Index idx
6154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6161 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6163 name "sec:Enumerate"
6170 \begin_layout Standard
6175 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6176 It has these properties:
6179 \begin_layout Enumerate
6180 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6184 \begin_layout Enumerate
6185 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6189 \begin_layout Enumerate
6191 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6194 \begin_layout Enumerate
6199 environment resets the counter to one.
6202 \begin_layout Enumerate
6215 \begin_layout Enumerate
6216 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6217 Items can have any length.
6220 \begin_layout Enumerate
6221 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6224 \begin_layout Enumerate
6225 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6228 \begin_layout Enumerate
6229 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6233 \begin_layout Standard
6242 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6244 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6245 labels the four different levels in an
6252 \begin_layout Enumerate
6253 The first level of an
6257 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6261 \begin_layout Enumerate
6262 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6266 \begin_layout Enumerate
6267 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6271 \begin_layout Enumerate
6272 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6275 \begin_layout Enumerate
6276 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6281 \begin_layout Enumerate
6282 Back to the third level
6286 \begin_layout Enumerate
6287 Back to the second level.
6291 \begin_layout Enumerate
6292 Back to the outermost level.
6295 \begin_layout Standard
6296 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6300 environment, see section
6301 \begin_inset space ~
6305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6307 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6312 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6316 \begin_layout Standard
6317 There is more to nesting
6321 environments than we've stated here.
6322 You should read section
6323 \begin_inset space ~
6327 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6329 reference "sec:Nesting"
6333 to learn more about nesting.
6336 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6338 \begin_inset Index idx
6341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6350 \begin_layout Standard
6351 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6355 list has no fixed label.
6356 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6365 of the first line as the label.
6369 \begin_layout Description
6370 Example: This is an example of the
6377 \begin_layout Standard
6379 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6383 \begin_layout Standard
6385 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6389 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6392 it is meant that the first usage of the
6396 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6398 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6406 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6411 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6412 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6414 \begin_inset space ~
6420 \begin_inset space ~
6424 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6426 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6430 for more information.) Here is an example:
6433 \begin_layout Description
6435 \begin_inset space ~
6438 Example: This one shows how to use a
6441 \begin_inset space ~
6453 \begin_layout Description
6454 Usage: You should use the
6458 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6459 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6461 It's not a good idea to use a
6465 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6466 You're better off using
6478 paragraphs into them.
6481 \begin_layout Description
6482 Nesting: You can nest
6486 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6490 \begin_layout Standard
6491 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6492 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6493 them from the first line.
6496 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6498 \begin_inset Index idx
6501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6510 \begin_layout Standard
6515 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6516 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6520 \begin_layout Standard
6529 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6531 Here are its properties:
6534 \begin_layout Labeling
6535 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6537 \begin_inset space ~
6540 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6549 of each line as the item label.
6554 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6555 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6556 space as described above.
6559 \begin_layout Labeling
6560 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6561 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6562 uses different margins for the item label and the
6563 body of the item text.
6564 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6565 label width plus a little extra space.
6569 \begin_layout Labeling
6570 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6572 \begin_inset space ~
6575 width \SpecialChar LyX
6576 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6577 If the label width is larger, the label
6578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6582 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6585 into the first line.
6586 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6587 margin of the rest of the item text.
6590 \begin_layout Labeling
6591 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6593 \begin_inset space ~
6596 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6601 environment has the same left margin.
6602 \begin_inset Newline newline
6605 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6608 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6610 \begin_inset space ~
6615 dialog (toolbar button
6618 arg "layout-paragraph"
6625 \begin_inset space ~
6630 determines the default label width.
6631 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6640 multiple times instead.
6641 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6651 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6654 \begin_inset space ~
6659 every time you alter a label in a
6664 \begin_inset Newline newline
6667 The predefined default width is the length of
6668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6676 \begin_inset space ~
6682 \begin_layout Standard
6687 list the same way as the
6691 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6697 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6701 \begin_layout Standard
6706 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6707 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6709 \begin_inset space ~
6713 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6715 reference "sec:Nesting"
6719 to learn about nesting.
6722 \begin_layout Standard
6723 There is yet another feature of the
6727 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6728 left-justifies the item labels by
6730 You can use additional
6734 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6735 justifies the item label.
6740 are documented in section
6741 \begin_inset space ~
6745 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6747 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6752 Here are some examples:
6755 \begin_layout Labeling
6756 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6757 Left The default for
6764 \begin_layout Labeling
6765 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6766 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6773 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6776 \begin_layout Labeling
6777 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6778 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6782 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6789 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6792 \begin_layout Subsection
6794 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6796 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6801 \begin_inset Index idx
6804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6813 \begin_layout Standard
6814 The features described in this section require that the module
6816 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6818 is loaded in the document settings.
6819 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6825 \begin_inset Index idx
6828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6838 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6839 Custom Enumerate Lists
6840 \begin_inset Index idx
6843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6844 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6852 \begin_layout Standard
6854 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6857 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6860 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6861 There you add the command
6864 \begin_layout Standard
6872 \begin_layout Standard
6884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6885 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6886 Code, look at section
6887 \begin_inset space ~
6891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6893 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6906 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6913 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6914 For capital Roman numerals replace
6926 in the command above.
6927 For Arabic numerals use
6935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6942 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6957 \begin_layout Standard
6959 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6967 You can only number 26
6968 \begin_inset space ~
6971 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6979 \begin_layout Standard
6980 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6981 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6984 \begin_layout Standard
6985 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6988 \begin_layout Enumerate
6989 \begin_inset Argument 1
6992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7018 \begin_layout Enumerate
7019 \begin_inset Argument 1
7022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7045 \begin_layout Enumerate
7050 \begin_layout Enumerate
7051 \begin_inset Argument 1
7054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7078 \begin_layout Enumerate
7079 \begin_inset Argument 1
7082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7108 \begin_layout Standard
7109 For this list these commands were used:
7112 \begin_layout Standard
7123 \begin_inset Newline newline
7131 \begin_inset Newline newline
7139 \begin_inset Newline newline
7149 \begin_layout Standard
7156 makes the label emphasized and
7165 \begin_layout Standard
7166 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7174 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7175 lists until you change the definition.
7183 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7185 \begin_inset Index idx
7188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7189 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7197 \begin_layout Standard
7198 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7201 \begin_layout Enumerate
7202 \begin_inset Argument 1
7205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7224 \begin_inset Note Note
7227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7228 goes back to default numbering
7236 \begin_layout Enumerate
7240 \begin_layout Standard
7244 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7248 \begin_layout Standard
7249 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7254 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7255 to indicate that it is a resumed
7256 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7257 , but in the output.
7260 \begin_layout Standard
7261 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7269 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7278 \begin_layout Standard
7279 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7281 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7282 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7283 of a normal enumeration.
7284 There, insert the command
7287 \begin_layout Standard
7293 \begin_layout Standard
7298 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7302 \begin_layout Enumerate
7306 \begin_layout Enumerate
7310 \begin_layout Standard
7311 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7314 \begin_layout Enumerate
7315 \begin_inset Argument 1
7318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7334 This enumeration starts at 4
7337 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7339 \begin_inset Index idx
7342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7351 \begin_layout Standard
7352 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7354 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7357 \begin_layout Itemize
7361 \begin_layout Itemize
7362 with standard spacing
7365 \begin_layout Standard
7366 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7368 Add there the command
7372 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7375 \begin_layout Itemize
7376 \begin_inset Argument 1
7379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7398 \begin_layout Itemize
7402 \begin_layout Itemize
7406 \begin_layout Standard
7407 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7414 \begin_inset Index idx
7417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7425 For more information see its documentation,
7426 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7436 \begin_layout Standard
7437 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7439 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7440 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7441 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7444 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7447 \begin_layout Enumerate
7448 \begin_inset Argument 1
7451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7459 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7472 \begin_layout Enumerate
7473 with negative indentation
7476 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7477 Further Customization
7478 \begin_inset Index idx
7481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7482 Lists ! Customization
7490 \begin_layout Standard
7491 You can also change the style of description lists.
7495 \begin_layout Standard
7501 \begin_layout Standard
7502 changes the description label font, the command
7505 \begin_layout Standard
7511 \begin_layout Standard
7512 sets the list style.
7515 \begin_layout Standard
7516 An example where the command
7519 \begin_layout Standard
7524 itshape, style=nextline
7527 \begin_layout Standard
7531 \begin_layout Description
7533 \begin_inset space ~
7537 \begin_inset Argument 1
7540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7546 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7548 itshape, style=nextline
7558 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7559 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7563 \begin_layout Description
7565 \begin_inset space ~
7568 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7569 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7570 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7573 \begin_layout Standard
7574 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7580 \begin_inset Index idx
7583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7591 For more information see its documentation
7592 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7602 \begin_layout Subsection
7604 \begin_inset Index idx
7607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7616 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7618 \begin_inset space ~
7621 Address: An Overview
7624 \begin_layout Standard
7625 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7626 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7634 \begin_inset space ~
7640 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7641 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7642 gags on the document.
7643 In contrast, you can use the
7650 \begin_inset space ~
7655 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7656 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7660 \begin_layout Standard
7661 Of course, you're not limited to using
7668 \begin_inset space ~
7677 \begin_inset space ~
7682 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7683 some European academic papers.
7686 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7688 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7690 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7697 \begin_layout Standard
7702 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7703 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7707 \begin_inset space ~
7712 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7713 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7714 Here's an example of each:
7717 \begin_layout Right Address
7719 \begin_inset Newline newline
7723 \begin_inset Newline newline
7727 \begin_inset Newline newline
7730 When is it? What is today?
7733 \begin_layout Standard
7737 \begin_inset space ~
7743 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7745 the largest block of text on a single line.
7746 Here's an example of the
7753 \begin_layout Address
7755 \begin_inset Newline newline
7758 Where do I send this
7759 \begin_inset Newline newline
7762 Your post office and country
7765 \begin_layout Standard
7766 As you can see, both
7773 \begin_inset space ~
7778 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7783 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7784 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7790 This makes sense, since
7798 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7799 Thus, you have to use
7806 arg "newline-insert newline"
7811 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7812 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7814 \begin_inset space ~
7818 \begin_inset space ~
7823 ) to start a new line in an
7830 \begin_inset space ~
7838 \begin_layout Subsection
7842 \begin_layout Standard
7843 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7844 or list of references.
7846 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7849 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7851 \begin_inset Index idx
7854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7863 \begin_layout Standard
7868 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7869 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7870 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7871 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7885 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7886 The book document classes ignores the
7890 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7894 in a letter document class.
7897 \begin_layout Standard
7902 environment does several things for you.
7903 First, it puts the centered label
7904 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7908 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7912 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7914 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7915 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7916 the subsequent text.
7917 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7919 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7923 \begin_layout Standard
7924 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7928 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7929 The new paragraph will still be in the
7934 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7935 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7938 \begin_layout Standard
7939 \begin_inset Float figure
7946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7948 \begin_inset Graphics
7949 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7957 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7960 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7962 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7983 \begin_layout Standard
7984 We would love to demonstrate the
7988 environment, but since this document is in the
7989 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7993 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7996 class, we can't do this.
7997 We inserted it therefore as figure
7998 \begin_inset space ~
8002 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8004 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8009 If you have never heard of an
8010 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8014 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8017 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
8020 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8022 \begin_inset Index idx
8025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8032 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8034 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
8041 \begin_layout Standard
8046 environment is used to list references.
8047 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8048 only use it at the end of the document.
8060 \begin_layout Standard
8061 When you first open a
8065 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
8066 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
8067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8075 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8079 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8082 depending on the document class.
8083 The heading is in a large boldface font.
8084 Each paragraph of the
8088 environment is a bibliography entry.
8093 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8094 Each new paragraph is still in the
8101 \begin_layout Standard
8102 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
8103 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
8105 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
8107 handling, have a look at section
8108 \begin_inset space ~
8112 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8114 reference "sec:Bibliography"
8121 \begin_layout Subsection
8122 Special Environments
8125 \begin_layout Standard
8127 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
8128 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
8131 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8136 \begin_inset Index idx
8139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8147 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8149 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8156 \begin_layout Standard
8162 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8164 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8169 key as a fixed whitespace.
8173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8186 \begin_inset space ~
8191 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8209 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8212 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8215 arg "newline-insert newline"
8232 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8233 So, when you finish using the
8238 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8239 Also, you can nest the
8244 environment inside of others.
8247 \begin_layout Standard
8248 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8251 \begin_layout Itemize
8255 arg "newline-insert newline"
8258 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8259 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8263 \begin_inset space \space{}
8273 arg "newline-insert newline"
8279 \begin_layout Itemize
8283 arg "newline-insert newline"
8293 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8299 \begin_layout Itemize
8300 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8301 You must put at least one
8305 in any line you want blank.
8306 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8310 \begin_layout Itemize
8311 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8315 since that will insert
8320 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8323 arg "self-insert \""
8329 \begin_layout Standard
8333 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8337 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8341 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8345 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8349 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8350 printf("Hello World!
8355 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8359 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8363 \begin_layout Standard
8364 This is just the standard
8365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8369 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8376 \begin_layout Standard
8382 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8384 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8385 as if you used a typewriter.
8386 \begin_inset Index idx
8389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8390 Paragraph environments|)
8395 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8398 Program Code Listings
8403 \begin_inset space ~
8411 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8415 \begin_inset Index idx
8418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8427 \begin_layout Standard
8432 environment is similar to the
8437 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8438 computer console text.
8443 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8457 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8458 you can have empty lines.
8471 \begin_layout Itemize
8472 have a certain language and a text style
8475 \begin_layout Itemize
8476 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8477 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8478 and \SpecialChar TeX
8482 \begin_layout Standard
8483 Because of these properties
8487 works like a typewriter.
8491 \begin_layout Verbatim
8495 \begin_layout Verbatim
8498 The following 2 lines are empty:
8501 \begin_layout Verbatim
8505 \begin_layout Verbatim
8509 \begin_layout Verbatim
8510 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8515 \begin_layout Standard
8520 environment is identical to
8524 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8525 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8532 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8536 \begin_layout Section
8537 Nesting Environments
8538 \begin_inset Index idx
8541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8542 Nesting ! Environments
8548 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8557 \begin_layout Subsection
8561 \begin_layout Standard
8563 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8565 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8567 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8569 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8581 \begin_layout Enumerate
8585 \begin_layout Enumerate
8590 \begin_layout Enumerate
8594 \begin_layout Enumerate
8599 \begin_layout Enumerate
8603 \begin_layout Standard
8604 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8605 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8607 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8609 \begin_inset space ~
8613 \begin_inset space ~
8621 \begin_inset space ~
8625 \begin_inset space ~
8630 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8632 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8635 arg "depth-increment"
8641 arg "depth-decrement"
8655 arg "depth-increment"
8661 arg "depth-decrement"
8665 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8666 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8670 \begin_layout Standard
8671 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8672 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8673 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8674 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8675 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8678 \begin_layout Standard
8679 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8681 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8683 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8686 \begin_layout Subsection
8687 What You Can and Can't Nest
8690 \begin_layout Standard
8691 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8692 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8695 \begin_layout Standard
8696 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8697 than a simple yes or no.
8698 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8701 \begin_layout Itemize
8702 Completely unnestable
8705 \begin_layout Itemize
8706 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8710 \begin_layout Itemize
8711 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8715 \begin_layout Standard
8716 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8717 environments have them:
8720 \begin_layout Description
8721 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8722 Can't nest into them.
8726 \begin_layout Itemize
8732 \begin_layout Itemize
8738 \begin_layout Itemize
8744 \begin_layout Itemize
8750 \begin_layout Itemize
8757 \begin_layout Description
8759 \begin_inset space ~
8762 Nestable You can nest them.
8763 You can nest other things into them.
8767 \begin_layout Itemize
8773 \begin_layout Itemize
8779 \begin_layout Itemize
8785 \begin_layout Itemize
8791 \begin_layout Itemize
8797 \begin_layout Itemize
8803 \begin_layout Itemize
8809 \begin_layout Itemize
8816 \begin_layout Itemize
8822 \begin_layout Itemize
8829 \begin_layout Description
8830 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8831 You can't nest anything into them.
8835 \begin_layout Itemize
8841 \begin_layout Itemize
8847 \begin_layout Itemize
8853 \begin_layout Itemize
8859 \begin_layout Itemize
8865 \begin_layout Itemize
8871 \begin_layout Itemize
8877 \begin_layout Itemize
8883 \begin_layout Itemize
8889 \begin_layout Itemize
8895 \begin_layout Itemize
8901 \begin_layout Itemize
8907 \begin_layout Itemize
8913 \begin_layout Itemize
8917 \begin_inset space ~
8923 \begin_layout Itemize
8930 \begin_layout Standard
8931 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8939 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8949 \begin_inset space ~
8952 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8953 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8954 nested section headings violate this.
8962 \begin_layout Subsection
8963 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8964 \begin_inset Index idx
8967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8968 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8976 \begin_layout Standard
8977 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8978 affected by nesting anyhow.
8982 \begin_layout Itemize
8986 \begin_layout Itemize
8990 \begin_layout Itemize
8994 \begin_layout Standard
8996 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9004 Figures and tables in
9008 are not affected by this.
9013 Have a look at section
9014 \begin_inset space ~
9018 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9020 reference "sec:Floats"
9024 for more information about
9031 \begin_layout Standard
9033 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
9034 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
9038 \begin_layout Standard
9039 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
9040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9047 of its own, it behaves just like a
9048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9055 paragraph environment.
9056 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
9060 \begin_layout Standard
9061 Here's an example with a table:
9064 \begin_layout Enumerate
9069 \begin_layout Enumerate
9070 This is (a) and it's nested.
9074 \begin_layout Standard
9075 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9081 \begin_layout Standard
9083 \begin_inset Tabular
9084 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9085 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9086 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9087 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9171 \begin_layout Standard
9172 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9179 \begin_layout Enumerate
9181 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9185 \begin_layout Enumerate
9189 \begin_layout Standard
9190 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9193 \begin_layout Enumerate
9198 \begin_layout Enumerate
9199 This is (a) and it's nested.
9203 \begin_layout Standard
9204 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9210 \begin_layout Standard
9212 \begin_inset Tabular
9213 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9214 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9215 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9216 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9300 \begin_layout Standard
9301 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9307 \begin_layout Enumerate
9314 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9317 \begin_layout Enumerate
9321 \begin_layout Standard
9322 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9326 \begin_layout Standard
9327 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9330 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9333 \begin_layout Enumerate
9338 \begin_layout Enumerate
9339 This is (a) and it's nested.
9342 \begin_layout Standard
9343 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9349 \begin_layout Standard
9351 \begin_inset Tabular
9352 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9353 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9354 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9355 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9440 \begin_layout Standard
9441 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9447 \begin_layout Enumerate
9449 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9456 \begin_layout Enumerate
9460 \begin_layout Standard
9461 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9467 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9468 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9472 \begin_layout Subsection
9473 Usage and General Features
9476 \begin_layout Standard
9477 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9478 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9487 is the innermost possible depth.
9488 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9491 \begin_layout Enumerate
9492 level #1 – outermost
9496 \begin_layout Enumerate
9501 \begin_layout Enumerate
9506 \begin_layout Enumerate
9511 \begin_layout Itemize
9516 \begin_layout Itemize
9525 \begin_layout Standard
9526 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9527 both of them in the example.
9528 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9538 For example, if we tried to nest another
9543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9550 , we would get errors.
9553 \begin_layout Subsection
9555 \begin_inset Index idx
9558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9567 \begin_layout Standard
9568 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9569 We have several examples of nested environments.
9570 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9574 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9575 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9578 \begin_layout Labeling
9579 \labelwidthstring MMM
9580 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9589 \begin_layout Labeling
9590 \labelwidthstring MMM
9591 #2-a This is level #2.
9592 We created it by using
9595 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9601 arg "depth-increment"
9608 \begin_layout Labeling
9609 \labelwidthstring MMM
9610 #3-a This is level #3.
9611 This time, we just enter
9618 arg "depth-increment"
9622 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9626 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9632 arg "depth-increment"
9639 \begin_layout Standard
9644 environment, nested inside of
9645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9653 So, it's at level #4.
9654 We did this by entering
9657 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9663 arg "depth-increment"
9666 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9671 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9687 \begin_layout Standard
9692 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9695 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9701 \begin_layout Labeling
9702 \labelwidthstring MMM
9703 #4-a This is level #4.
9707 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9710 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9715 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9719 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9724 keep nesting things inside
9725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9736 \begin_layout Labeling
9737 \labelwidthstring MMM
9738 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9743 \begin_layout Labeling
9744 \labelwidthstring MMM
9745 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9746 and this is level #6.
9747 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9751 \begin_layout Labeling
9752 \labelwidthstring MMM
9753 #5-b Back to level #5.
9757 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9763 arg "depth-decrement"
9770 \begin_layout Labeling
9771 \labelwidthstring MMM
9775 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9781 arg "depth-decrement"
9784 , we're back at level #4.
9788 \begin_layout Labeling
9789 \labelwidthstring MMM
9790 #3-b Back to level #3.
9791 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9795 \begin_layout Labeling
9796 \labelwidthstring MMM
9797 #2-b Back to level #2.
9802 \begin_layout Labeling
9803 \labelwidthstring MMM
9804 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9805 After this sentence, we will enter
9809 and change the paragraph environment back to
9816 \begin_layout Standard
9817 We could have also used the
9833 environment in place of the
9838 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9841 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9842 Example 2: Inheritance
9845 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9846 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9849 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9858 arg "depth-increment"
9862 \begin_inset Newline newline
9865 which, we will change to the
9873 \begin_layout Enumerate
9878 environment, at level #2.
9881 \begin_layout Enumerate
9882 Notice how the nested
9886 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9890 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9894 \begin_layout Standard
9895 We ended this example by entering
9900 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9904 and reset the nesting depth by using
9907 arg "depth-decrement"
9913 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9914 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9923 \begin_inset Argument 1
9926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9927 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9935 \begin_layout Enumerate
9936 This is level #1, in an
9940 paragraph environment.
9941 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9945 \begin_layout Enumerate
9950 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9956 arg "depth-increment"
9960 Now, what happens if we nest an
9964 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9965 label be? An asterisk?
9969 \begin_layout Itemize
9979 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9980 So, its label is a bullet.
9981 (We got here by using
9984 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9990 arg "depth-increment"
9993 , then changing the environment to
10001 \begin_layout Itemize
10002 Here's level #4, produced using
10005 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10011 arg "depth-increment"
10015 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
10020 \begin_layout Enumerate
10022 to get to level #5.
10023 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
10028 Notice the type of numbering, it is
10032 , because we are in the
10040 environment (that is, it is an
10055 \begin_layout Enumerate
10060 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
10061 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
10065 \begin_layout Enumerate
10066 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
10069 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10072 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
10075 \begin_layout Enumerate
10079 arg "depth-decrement"
10082 to decrease the depth after the next
10085 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10092 \begin_layout Enumerate
10094 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
10099 \begin_layout Enumerate
10101 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
10102 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
10106 \begin_layout Enumerate
10107 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
10116 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
10121 reset the counter for the label.
10125 \begin_layout Enumerate
10129 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10135 arg "depth-decrement"
10138 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
10139 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
10140 into the twofold-nested
10148 \begin_layout Enumerate
10149 The same thing happens if we do another
10152 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10158 arg "depth-decrement"
10161 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10164 \begin_layout Standard
10165 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10170 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10181 The number of other
10185 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10192 The same rule applies for the
10196 environment, as well.
10199 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10200 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10203 \begin_layout Enumerate
10204 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10205 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10206 the same detail with how we did it.
10215 \begin_layout Standard
10223 arg "depth-increment"
10230 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10231 the example in parentheses someplace.
10232 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10233 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10234 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10238 \begin_layout Enumerate
10243 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10247 \begin_layout Verse
10248 Now we will add verse.
10249 \begin_inset Newline newline
10252 It will get much worse.
10253 \begin_inset Newline newline
10263 arg "depth-increment"
10273 \begin_layout Verse
10274 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10275 \begin_inset Newline newline
10278 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10279 \begin_inset Newline newline
10285 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10293 \begin_layout Verse
10294 Here comes a table:
10298 \begin_layout Standard
10299 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10305 \begin_layout Standard
10307 \begin_inset Tabular
10308 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10309 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10310 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10311 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10396 \begin_layout Verse
10400 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10410 arg "depth-increment"
10416 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10422 \begin_inset Newline newline
10430 arg "depth-decrement"
10437 \begin_layout Enumerate
10442 : level #1) This is another item.
10443 Note that selecting a
10447 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10448 3 times to put the table inside the
10456 \begin_layout Quotation
10457 We're now ending the
10461 list and changing to
10466 We're still at level #1.
10467 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10468 The next set of paragraphs is a
10469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10476 We will nest both the
10483 \begin_inset space ~
10488 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10492 for the letter body.
10496 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10499 to preserve the depth.
10500 Remember that you need to use
10503 arg "newline-insert newline"
10506 to create multiple lines inside the
10513 \begin_inset space ~
10523 \begin_layout Right Address
10525 \begin_inset Newline newline
10528 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10529 \begin_inset Newline newline
10535 \begin_layout Address
10537 \begin_inset space ~
10543 \begin_layout Quotation
10544 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10545 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10548 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10549 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10550 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10551 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10552 as soon as possible.
10553 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10556 \begin_layout Quotation
10557 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10558 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10559 with your order, along with payment.
10562 \begin_layout Quotation
10563 We thank you again for your patience.
10566 \begin_layout Address
10568 \begin_inset Newline newline
10575 \begin_layout Quotation
10576 That ends that example!
10579 \begin_layout Standard
10580 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10581 gives you a lot of power with just
10583 We could have easily nested an
10604 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10607 \begin_layout Subsection
10609 \begin_inset Index idx
10612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10613 Nesting ! Separation
10619 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10621 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10628 \begin_layout Standard
10629 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10631 For example you need two different enumerations:
10634 \begin_layout Enumerate
10639 \begin_layout Enumerate
10644 \begin_layout Enumerate
10648 \begin_layout Standard
10649 \begin_inset Separator plain
10655 \begin_layout Itemize
10661 \begin_layout Standard
10662 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10668 \begin_layout Enumerate
10672 \begin_layout Enumerate
10676 \begin_layout Enumerate
10680 \begin_layout Standard
10681 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10682 list item and use the menu
10684 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10685 Separated <Name> Above
10689 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10690 Separated <Name> Below
10693 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10694 ) and before or behind it the
10696 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
10699 \begin_layout Standard
10700 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10701 (red arrow in LyX).
10702 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10703 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10706 \begin_layout Standard
10707 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10710 arg "paragraph-break"
10717 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10720 \begin_layout Section
10721 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10722 \begin_inset Index idx
10725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10734 \begin_layout Standard
10735 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10736 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10738 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10739 be broken at the end of a line.
10740 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10744 \begin_layout Subsection
10746 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10748 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10753 \begin_inset Index idx
10756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10765 \begin_layout Standard
10766 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10767 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10768 ) not to break the line at
10770 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10773 \begin_layout Quote
10774 Further documentation is given in section
10775 \begin_inset Newline newline
10779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10781 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10789 \begin_layout Standard
10790 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10803 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10805 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10814 A protected space is set with
10816 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10817 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10819 \begin_inset space ~
10827 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10833 \begin_layout Subsection
10835 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10837 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10842 \begin_inset Index idx
10845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10846 Spacing ! Horizontal
10854 \begin_layout Standard
10855 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10857 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10858 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10862 The length units are listed in Appendix
10863 \begin_inset space ~
10867 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10869 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10876 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10878 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10880 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10885 \begin_inset Index idx
10888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10889 Spaces ! Inter-word
10897 \begin_layout Standard
10898 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10899 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10900 at the ends of sentences.
10901 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10902 automatically takes care about this.
10903 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10904 followed by a period; see section
10905 \begin_inset space ~
10909 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10911 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10916 To insert a normal space, select
10918 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10919 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10921 \begin_inset space ~
10929 arg "space-insert normal"
10935 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10937 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10939 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10944 \begin_inset Index idx
10947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10956 \begin_layout Standard
10958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10965 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10974 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10975 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10976 inside abbreviations:
10979 \begin_layout Quote
10981 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10985 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10988 \begin_layout Standard
10989 or between values and units.
10990 Compare for example this:
10991 \begin_inset Newline newline
10995 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10999 \begin_inset Newline newline
11002 10 kg (normal space
11005 \begin_layout Standard
11006 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
11008 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11009 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11011 \begin_inset space ~
11019 arg "space-insert thin"
11025 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11029 \begin_layout Standard
11030 You can also insert the following space types:
11033 \begin_layout Description
11035 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161965
11037 \begin_inset space ~
11043 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11047 \begin_inset space \medspace{}
11051 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11055 \change_deleted -712698321 1593161991
11057 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161992
11060 space between the arrows.
11061 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162006
11065 \begin_layout Description
11067 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162010
11069 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162011
11073 \begin_inset space ~
11076 space A line with a
11077 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11081 \begin_inset space \thickspace{}
11085 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11089 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162017
11091 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162018
11094 space between the arrows.
11097 \begin_layout Description
11099 \begin_inset space ~
11103 \begin_inset space ~
11106 space A line with a
11107 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11111 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
11115 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11118 negative thin space between the arrows.
11121 \begin_layout Description
11123 \begin_inset space ~
11127 \begin_inset space ~
11130 space A line with a
11131 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11135 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
11139 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11142 negative medium space between the arrows.
11145 \begin_layout Description
11147 \begin_inset space ~
11151 \begin_inset space ~
11154 space A line with a
11155 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11159 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
11163 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11166 negative thick space between the arrows.
11169 \begin_layout Description
11171 \begin_inset space ~
11175 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11179 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11183 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
11187 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11191 \begin_inset space ~
11195 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11198 em) space between the arrows.
11201 \begin_layout Description
11203 \begin_inset space ~
11207 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11211 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11215 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11219 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11223 \begin_inset space ~
11227 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11230 em) space between the arrows.
11233 \begin_layout Description
11235 \begin_inset space ~
11239 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11243 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11247 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11251 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11255 \begin_inset space ~
11259 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11262 em) space between the arrows.
11265 \begin_layout Description
11267 \begin_inset space ~
11271 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11275 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11280 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11284 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11287 cm space between the arrows.
11290 \begin_layout Standard
11292 \begin_inset space ~
11296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11298 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11302 lists the different space sizes.
11305 \begin_layout Standard
11306 \begin_inset Float table
11313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11314 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11317 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11319 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11323 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11333 \begin_inset Tabular
11334 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="12" columns="2">
11335 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11336 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11337 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11377 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11401 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11425 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11434 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
11435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11440 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11451 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11453 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11462 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
11463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11468 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11479 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11481 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11505 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11509 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11513 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11537 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11561 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11576 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11589 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11604 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11617 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11632 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11645 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11666 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11668 \begin_inset Index idx
11671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11680 \begin_layout Standard
11681 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11682 feature for adding extra space
11683 in a uniform fashion.
11684 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11685 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11686 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11687 equally between themselves.
11690 \begin_layout Standard
11691 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11694 \begin_layout Quote
11696 This is on the left side
11697 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11700 This is on the right
11703 \begin_layout Quote
11706 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11710 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11716 \begin_layout Quote
11719 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11723 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11727 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11733 \begin_layout Standard
11734 That was an example in the
11740 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11744 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11748 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11751 is one in a standard paragraph.
11752 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11756 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11759 \begin_layout Standard
11760 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11763 \begin_inset space ~
11768 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11771 \begin_layout Standard
11773 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11777 \begin_inset space ~
11783 \begin_layout Standard
11785 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11789 \begin_inset space ~
11795 \begin_layout Standard
11797 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11801 \begin_inset space ~
11807 \begin_layout Standard
11809 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11813 \begin_inset space ~
11819 \begin_layout Standard
11821 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242277
11823 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242278
11827 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242369
11828 (= opened downwards)
11831 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11835 \begin_inset space ~
11841 \begin_layout Standard
11843 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242281
11845 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242282
11849 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242378
11853 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11857 \begin_inset space ~
11863 \begin_layout Standard
11864 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11872 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11876 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11878 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11879 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11883 option in the space dialog.
11891 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11893 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11895 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11900 \begin_inset Index idx
11903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11912 \begin_layout Standard
11913 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11914 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11917 \begin_layout Standard
11918 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11921 What is correct English?:
11922 \begin_inset Newline newline
11926 \begin_inset Newline newline
11930 \begin_inset space ~
11933 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11934 \begin_inset Newline newline
11938 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11949 \begin_inset Newline newline
11953 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11964 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11970 \begin_layout Standard
11972 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11973 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11977 \begin_inset space ~
11981 \begin_inset space ~
11985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11989 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11991 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11992 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11996 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11998 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12002 \begin_inset space ~
12006 \begin_inset space ~
12010 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12013 into the phantom inset (note the space after
12014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12022 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
12023 That is why it is named
12024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12032 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
12033 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
12037 \begin_layout Subsection
12039 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12041 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
12046 \begin_inset Index idx
12049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12058 \begin_layout Standard
12059 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
12061 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12062 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12064 \begin_inset space ~
12070 There you find the following sizes:
12073 \begin_layout Standard
12086 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
12087 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
12092 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
12094 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12095 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
12097 \begin_inset space ~
12103 \begin_inset Index idx
12106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12107 Document ! Settings
12112 for the paragraph separation.
12113 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
12122 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360527
12126 \begin_layout Standard
12128 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360570
12137 equal to the height, or half the height, of a line in the current font
12138 size including line spacing.
12143 \begin_layout Standard
12149 \begin_inset Index idx
12152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12158 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
12159 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
12164 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
12165 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
12174 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
12178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12183 s are described in section
12184 \begin_inset space ~
12188 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12190 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12199 If there are several
12203 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
12204 You can therefore use
12208 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
12211 \begin_layout Standard
12216 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
12217 \begin_inset space ~
12221 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12223 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12230 \begin_layout Standard
12231 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12241 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
12242 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
12254 \begin_layout Subsection
12255 Paragraph Alignment
12256 \begin_inset Index idx
12259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12260 Paragraph ! Alignment
12268 \begin_layout Standard
12269 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
12271 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
12274 dialog (toolbar button
12277 arg "layout-paragraph"
12281 There are five possibilities:
12284 \begin_layout Itemize
12292 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
12298 \begin_layout Itemize
12306 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12312 \begin_layout Itemize
12320 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12326 \begin_layout Itemize
12334 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12340 \begin_layout Itemize
12348 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12354 \begin_layout Standard
12355 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12356 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12357 the left and right margins.
12358 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12361 \begin_layout Standard
12363 This paragraph is right aligned,
12366 \begin_layout Standard
12368 this one is centered,
12371 \begin_layout Standard
12373 this one is left aligned.
12376 \begin_layout Subsection
12378 \begin_inset Index idx
12381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12382 Page breaks ! Forced
12388 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12390 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12397 \begin_layout Standard
12398 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12399 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12400 force a page break where you want one.
12401 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12402 is good at page breaking.
12403 Only if you use a lot of
12407 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12408 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12411 \begin_layout Standard
12412 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12413 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12417 have to change the page breaking.
12420 \begin_layout Standard
12421 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12423 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12425 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12426 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12428 \begin_inset space ~
12434 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12436 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12437 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12439 \begin_inset space ~
12444 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12446 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12447 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12450 \begin_layout Standard
12451 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12452 at the top of a page.
12453 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12455 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12456 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12457 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12459 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12461 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12465 to learn more about
12472 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12474 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12476 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12481 \begin_inset Index idx
12484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12485 Page breaks ! Clear
12493 \begin_layout Standard
12494 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12495 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12496 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12497 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12498 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12501 \begin_layout Standard
12502 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12504 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12505 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12507 \begin_inset space ~
12513 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12515 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12516 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12518 \begin_inset space ~
12522 \begin_inset space ~
12527 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12528 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12531 \begin_layout Subsection
12533 \begin_inset Index idx
12536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12543 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12545 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12552 \begin_layout Standard
12553 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12555 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12557 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12558 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12560 \begin_inset space ~
12564 \begin_inset space ~
12572 arg "newline-insert newline"
12576 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12578 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12579 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12581 \begin_inset space ~
12585 \begin_inset space ~
12593 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12596 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12598 This is useful to avoid
12599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12606 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12609 \begin_layout Standard
12610 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12611 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12613 very good at line breaking.
12614 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12615 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12616 \begin_inset space ~
12620 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12622 reference "sec:Quote"
12627 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12629 reference "sec:Verse"
12634 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12636 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12643 \begin_layout Subsection
12645 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12647 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12652 \begin_inset Index idx
12655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12664 \begin_layout Standard
12666 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12677 \begin_layout Standard
12681 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12682 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12684 \begin_inset space ~
12689 you can insert horizontal lines.
12690 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12691 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12692 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12695 \begin_layout Standard
12697 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12708 \begin_layout Section
12709 Characters and Symbols
12712 \begin_layout Standard
12713 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12714 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12715 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12717 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12721 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12723 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12727 for information on how this is done.
12730 \begin_layout Standard
12731 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12736 dialog via the menu
12738 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12739 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12745 \begin_layout Standard
12746 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12754 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12755 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12757 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12765 \begin_layout Section
12766 Fonts and Text Styles
12767 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12769 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12776 \begin_layout Subsection
12778 \begin_inset Index idx
12781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12790 \begin_layout Standard
12791 There are two types of fonts:
12794 \begin_layout Description
12796 \begin_inset space ~
12800 \begin_inset Index idx
12803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12809 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12810 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12814 characters) in the font.
12815 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12816 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12817 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12818 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12819 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12820 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12821 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12822 \begin_inset Newline newline
12825 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12826 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12827 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12828 sizes than at small ones.
12829 \begin_inset Newline newline
12843 \begin_inset space ~
12851 \begin_layout Description
12853 \begin_inset space ~
12857 \begin_inset Index idx
12860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12866 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12867 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12868 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12869 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12870 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12871 image manipulation program.
12872 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12873 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12874 \begin_inset space ~
12877 pixels high up to 34
12878 \begin_inset space ~
12881 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12882 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12883 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12885 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12886 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12887 \begin_inset Newline newline
12890 Bitmap fonts are named
12893 \begin_inset space ~
12898 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12901 \begin_layout Standard
12902 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12903 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12904 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12905 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12906 use scalable fonts.
12909 \begin_layout Standard
12910 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12913 \begin_layout Standard
12914 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12916 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
12918 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757415
12921 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12922 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12923 font to emphasize text, you use an
12924 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12928 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12932 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12934 In \SpecialChar LyX
12935 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12939 \begin_layout Subsection
12942 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12944 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12951 \begin_layout Standard
12952 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12953 used its own fonts.
12954 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12955 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12958 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12959 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12960 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12961 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12962 to a word processor.
12963 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12964 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12965 files are very portable across
12966 different machines.
12967 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12968 has increased a lot
12969 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12972 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12974 \begin_inset space ~
12978 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12980 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12985 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12986 code in the document
12987 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12990 \begin_layout Standard
12991 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12992 engines that are also able directly
12993 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12995 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12997 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12999 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
13000 that is installed on your system.
13001 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
13004 \begin_layout Standard
13005 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13013 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
13014 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
13022 \begin_layout Subsection
13023 Document Font and Font size
13024 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13026 name "subsec:Document-Font"
13031 \begin_inset Index idx
13034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13041 \begin_inset Index idx
13044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13053 \begin_layout Standard
13054 You can set the document fonts in the
13056 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13060 \begin_inset Index idx
13063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13064 Document ! Settings
13074 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
13075 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
13078 \begin_inset space ~
13087 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
13089 \begin_inset space ~
13092 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
13095 \begin_layout Standard
13100 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
13101 This requires that you use
13113 as the output format, i.
13114 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13118 \begin_inset space \space{}
13121 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13122 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13123 installed (see section
13124 \begin_inset space ~
13128 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13130 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13135 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
13137 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
13138 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
13140 \begin_inset space ~
13143 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
13144 cannot determine the family.
13145 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
13146 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
13149 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
13152 \begin_layout Standard
13153 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
13154 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
13159 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13165 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
13167 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
13169 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
13172 font encoding, this is
13173 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
13174 , depending on the document language,
13177 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
13178 either the the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13180 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13186 \begin_inset space ~
13192 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13202 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
13203 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13205 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13211 \begin_inset space ~
13217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13225 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
13229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13246 European Computer Modern
13249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13257 However, some classes set different default fonts.
13260 \begin_layout Standard
13265 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
13266 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
13270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13271 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
13274 \begin_inset space ~
13279 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
13285 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
13286 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
13289 \begin_layout Itemize
13293 \begin_inset space ~
13298 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13311 \begin_inset space ~
13316 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13317 community in order to replace
13321 as the default font.
13322 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13323 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13326 \begin_inset space ~
13339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13340 One difference is improved kerning.
13348 \begin_layout Itemize
13349 If you do not like the look of
13357 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13358 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13362 \begin_inset space ~
13368 \begin_inset space ~
13378 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13379 \begin_inset space ~
13382 serif and typewriter fonts,
13386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13387 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13388 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13394 \begin_inset space ~
13403 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13404 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13408 \begin_inset space \space{}
13416 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13420 \begin_inset space \space{}
13426 \begin_inset space ~
13434 \begin_inset space ~
13444 but you can also select your own.
13445 \begin_inset Newline newline
13448 The differences between roman,
13451 \begin_inset space ~
13460 fonts are explained in section
13461 \begin_inset space ~
13465 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13467 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13472 \begin_inset Newline newline
13478 \begin_inset space ~
13483 was originally designed for newspapers.
13484 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13485 into the small newspaper columns.
13489 \begin_inset space ~
13494 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13497 \begin_layout Standard
13498 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13511 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13516 depends on the class you are using.
13517 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13520 \begin_layout Standard
13521 Note that the font size is the
13526 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13527 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13528 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13529 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13532 \begin_inset space ~
13538 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13539 \begin_inset space ~
13543 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13545 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13552 \begin_layout Standard
13556 \begin_inset space ~
13561 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13563 \begin_inset space ~
13566 serif or typewriter.
13571 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13581 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13584 \begin_layout Standard
13589 LaTeX font encoding
13591 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13592 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13598 \begin_inset Index idx
13601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13609 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
13611 \begin_inset space ~
13615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13617 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13624 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13625 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13626 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
13630 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
13638 \begin_layout Standard
13639 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13641 Use Old Style Figures
13645 Use True Small Caps
13648 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13651 Use Old Style Figures
13653 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13655 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13656 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13660 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13663 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13667 Use True Small Caps
13669 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13670 of scaled capitals.
13671 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13672 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13673 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000270
13677 \begin_layout Standard
13679 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000448
13680 Furthermore, with some fonts, you can add additional (comma-separated) options
13681 provided by the font package (or the
13685 package, if you use non-TeX fonts), into the
13690 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
13696 \begin_layout Standard
13701 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13702 a font to display the script characters.
13706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13707 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13713 \begin_inset Index idx
13716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13723 So this has no effect for the document language
13739 \begin_layout Standard
13742 Enable micro-typographic extensions
13744 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
13745 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13751 \begin_inset Index idx
13754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13756 packages ! microtype
13765 \begin_layout Standard
13768 Disallow line breaks after dashes
13770 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
13774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13775 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13776 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13782 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
13783 \begin_inset space ~
13787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13789 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
13799 \begin_layout Standard
13800 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13804 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13812 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13817 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13818 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13820 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13822 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13825 dialog, see section
13826 \begin_inset space ~
13830 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13832 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13844 \begin_layout Subsection
13848 \begin_layout Standard
13849 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13850 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13852 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13853 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13854 choose a math font in the dialog
13856 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13860 \begin_inset Index idx
13863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13864 Document ! Settings
13870 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13871 automatically selects a math font.
13872 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13873 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13882 \begin_inset space ~
13888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13893 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13894 document font is available.
13897 \begin_layout Standard
13898 Note that the math font will not be used for
13902 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13908 or by the insertion of the command
13915 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13916 \begin_inset space ~
13920 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13921 while the math characters do not.
13923 \begin_inset space ~
13926 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13929 \begin_inset space ~
13937 \begin_inset space ~
13942 in the document font settings.
13945 \begin_layout Standard
13946 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13947 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13948 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13949 font (in most cases
13950 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13956 \begin_inset space ~
13962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13965 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13966 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13968 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13974 \begin_inset space ~
13980 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13986 \begin_layout Subsection
13988 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
13990 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
13994 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
13996 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13998 name "subsec:charstyles"
14005 \begin_inset Index idx
14008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14015 \begin_inset Index idx
14018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14027 \begin_layout Standard
14028 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
14029 automatically changes the
14030 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
14033 style for certain paragraph environments.
14035 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
14036 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
14038 This is where we meet the concept of
14044 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
14046 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
14050 \begin_layout Standard
14052 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
14057 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
14059 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
14072 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
14078 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14081 e., available with all document classes.
14082 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
14086 for specific purposes.
14087 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
14090 \begin_layout Standard
14092 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
14093 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
14103 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
14107 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
14108 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14120 — you customized the
14125 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
14126 among them, encourage the use of
14138 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
14139 \begin_inset space ~
14143 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14145 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14150 Rather than fiddling with
14154 , they encourage the use of
14158 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
14159 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14163 \begin_inset Quotes els
14167 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14170 ), not their form (
14171 \begin_inset Quotes els
14175 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14179 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
14180 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
14181 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
14182 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
14183 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
14184 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
14190 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
14191 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14194 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
14195 With a semantic markup (such as
14199 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
14204 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14206 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
14207 of a document, using different markup semantics.
14210 \begin_layout Standard
14212 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
14213 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided
14214 by \SpecialChar LyX
14220 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14222 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
14223 Builtin Text Styles
14224 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14226 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
14233 \begin_layout Standard
14235 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
14236 The two builtin text styles can be
14237 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
14241 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
14245 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
14246 both of these styles
14249 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
14257 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
14263 \begin_layout Standard
14268 style, do one of the following:
14271 \begin_layout Itemize
14272 click on the toolbar button
14281 \begin_layout Itemize
14282 use the key binding
14289 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
14293 \begin_layout Itemize
14295 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
14303 arg "dialog-show character"
14309 arg "dialog-show character"
14312 ) as described in section
14313 \begin_inset space ~
14317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14319 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14328 \begin_layout Standard
14329 These commands are all toggles.
14334 style is already active, they deactivate it.
14337 \begin_layout Standard
14338 One typically uses the
14342 style for proper names.
14344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14351 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
14353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14357 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
14361 \begin_layout Standard
14363 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
14368 is producing text in
14372 , but the definition can be changed.
14377 \begin_layout Standard
14379 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
14381 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
14389 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
14396 \begin_layout Itemize
14397 clicking on the toolbar button
14406 \begin_layout Itemize
14407 using the keybindings
14414 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
14418 \begin_layout Itemize
14420 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
14428 arg "dialog-show character"
14434 arg "dialog-show character"
14437 ) as described in section
14438 \begin_inset space ~
14442 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14444 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14453 \begin_layout Standard
14458 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14460 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
14462 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
14465 packages use a different font
14466 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
14467 , and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14473 \begin_layout Standard
14474 We've been using the
14478 style all over the place in this document.
14479 Here's one more example:
14482 \begin_layout Quotation
14486 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
14488 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
14494 \begin_layout Standard
14495 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
14496 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
14497 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
14498 the common tendency to overuse
14499 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
14501 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
14506 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
14510 \begin_layout Standard
14512 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
14513 In contrast to the custom text styles, the builtin styles are represented
14514 only as font changes and integrated in the
14522 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
14525 always reset to the default font using the key binding
14532 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
14534 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
14538 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
14541 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14543 \begin_inset space ~
14546 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14548 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598544
14554 arg "dialog-show character"
14560 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
14562 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
14568 arg "dialog-show character"
14572 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596575
14576 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14578 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
14580 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14582 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
14589 \begin_layout Standard
14591 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
14592 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class, a module (see
14594 \begin_inset space ~
14598 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14600 reference "subsec:Modules"
14607 ), or local layout settings (see section
14608 \begin_inset space ~
14612 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14614 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
14619 As the two builtin styles, they provide
14623 markup for specific functions.
14624 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
14629 module that provides, among other things, some custom text styles to markup
14639 \begin_inset Quotes els
14643 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14649 \begin_layout Standard
14651 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
14652 These styles can be found, if available, in the
14654 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14660 \begin_layout Standard
14662 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
14663 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
14668 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
14669 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
14670 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
14675 appears as normal font change, the custom text style
14676 \begin_inset Flex Emph
14679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14681 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
14689 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
14690 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
14691 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
14692 \begin_inset Flex Code
14695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14697 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
14706 \begin_inset Flex Strong
14709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14711 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
14720 \begin_inset Flex Noun
14723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14725 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
14734 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate
14735 on screen their formal appearance.
14740 \begin_layout Subsection
14742 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
14744 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
14748 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
14754 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
14756 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
14762 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
14764 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
14768 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14770 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14775 \begin_inset Index idx
14778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14787 \begin_layout Standard
14788 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
14789 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
14792 fine-tuning; so \SpecialChar LyX
14794 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
14796 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
14800 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
14801 the properties of text passages
14802 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
14806 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
14807 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
14808 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
14809 from ordinary dialog.
14810 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
14814 \begin_layout Standard
14816 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
14817 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module
14818 for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better way
14819 of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak
14820 the properties of the respective text passages.
14825 comes in as a last resort.
14830 \begin_layout Standard
14831 Before we document how to
14832 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
14833 use custom character style
14834 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
14835 tweak the text properties
14837 , we want to issue a warning yet again: Don't overuse
14838 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
14840 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
14844 \begin_inset Newline newline
14847 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
14848 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
14851 \begin_layout Standard
14853 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
14854 use custom character styles
14855 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
14856 tweak text properties
14859 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
14862 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14864 \begin_inset space ~
14867 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14869 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599762
14875 arg "dialog-show character"
14880 dialog or press the toolbar button
14883 arg "dialog-show character"
14888 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
14891 boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
14892 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
14894 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
14897 property that you can choose.
14898 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
14901 \begin_inset space ~
14906 , which keeps the current state of that property.
14908 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
14912 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
14914 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
14919 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
14920 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
14921 environments all at once.
14924 \begin_layout Standard
14926 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
14928 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
14931 properties, and their options (in addition to
14934 \begin_inset space ~
14940 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
14944 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
14952 \begin_layout Labeling
14953 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14967 The possible options are:
14971 \begin_layout Labeling
14972 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14977 This is the Roman font family.
14978 Normally a serif font.
14979 It's also the default family.
14989 \begin_layout Labeling
14990 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14994 \begin_inset space ~
15001 This is the Sans Serif font family.
15013 \begin_layout Labeling
15014 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15021 This is the Typewriter font family.
15027 arg "font-typewriter"
15033 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
15037 \begin_layout Standard
15039 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
15040 The general differences of these families are:
15043 \begin_layout Itemize
15045 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
15050 fonts use characters with serifs.
15051 These are the small
15052 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15059 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15060 The following example shows the difference:
15061 \begin_inset Newline newline
15065 \begin_inset Newline newline
15070 text without serifs
15073 \begin_inset Newline newline
15076 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15077 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15084 \begin_layout Itemize
15086 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15091 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15092 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15093 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15096 \begin_layout Itemize
15098 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15104 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15108 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15111 font, which means every character has the same width; the
15112 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15116 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15120 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15124 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15129 \begin_inset Newline newline
15133 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
15136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15138 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15149 \begin_inset Note Note
15152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15154 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15155 For more on phantoms see section
15156 \begin_inset space ~
15160 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15162 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15172 \begin_inset Newline newline
15181 \begin_layout Labeling
15182 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15187 This corresponds to the print weight.
15192 \begin_layout Labeling
15193 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15198 This is the Medium font series.
15199 It's also the default series.
15202 \begin_layout Labeling
15203 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15210 This is the Bold font series.
15223 \begin_layout Labeling
15224 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15229 As the name implies.
15234 \begin_layout Labeling
15235 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15240 This is the Upright font shape.
15241 It's also the default shape.
15244 \begin_layout Labeling
15245 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15255 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
15260 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
15265 s the Italic font shape
15271 \begin_layout Labeling
15272 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15279 This is the Slanted font shape
15281 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
15282 , this is different from italic).
15285 \begin_layout Labeling
15286 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15290 \begin_inset space ~
15297 This is the Small caps font shape
15304 \begin_layout Labeling
15305 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15310 Alters the text color.
15311 Note that not all DVI
15312 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599925
15314 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
15317 viewers are able to display colors.
15319 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599934
15323 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
15325 \begin_inset space ~
15332 , which means that the document default color set in
15334 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15335 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15341 \begin_inset space ~
15347 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
15349 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599960
15353 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
15433 \begin_inset Index idx
15436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15445 \begin_layout Labeling
15446 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15451 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
15452 the language of the document.
15453 Text marked in this way will be underlined
15454 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600006
15455 in the \SpecialChar LyX
15458 in blue to indicate the change
15459 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
15460 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
15464 \begin_inset Newline newline
15467 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
15469 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
15470 When using the spell checking (see section
15471 \begin_inset space ~
15475 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15477 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
15481 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
15482 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
15484 \begin_inset Newline newline
15487 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
15489 Exclude from Spellchecking
15492 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
15495 \begin_layout Labeling
15496 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15501 Alters the size of the font.
15503 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
15505 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
15509 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
15512 numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportional to the
15513 document font size.
15514 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
15515 the details, but a general description of what
15521 \begin_layout Labeling
15522 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15543 arg "font-size tiny"
15549 \begin_layout Labeling
15550 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15558 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15571 arg "font-size scriptsize"
15577 \begin_layout Labeling
15578 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15599 arg "font-size footnotesize"
15605 \begin_layout Labeling
15606 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15614 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15627 arg "font-size small"
15633 \begin_layout Labeling
15634 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15648 It's also the default size.
15652 arg "font-size normal"
15658 \begin_layout Labeling
15659 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15680 arg "font-size large"
15686 \begin_layout Labeling
15687 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15708 arg "font-size larger"
15714 \begin_layout Labeling
15715 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15736 arg "font-size largest"
15742 \begin_layout Labeling
15743 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15751 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15755 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15764 arg "font-size huge"
15770 \begin_layout Labeling
15771 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15779 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15792 arg "font-size giant"
15798 \begin_layout Labeling
15799 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15804 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
15805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15813 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15824 arg "font-size increase"
15830 \begin_layout Labeling
15831 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15836 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
15837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15845 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15856 arg "font-size decrease"
15863 \begin_layout Standard
15868 : don't go crazy with this feature.
15869 You should almost never need to change the font size.
15871 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
15872 — use those instead.
15873 This is here for fine-tuning only!
15876 \begin_layout Labeling
15877 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15879 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
15883 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
15889 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
15890 change a few other things at the character level
15891 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
15892 have text passages being underlined
15896 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
15897 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
15898 days, when you could not change fonts.
15899 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15900 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15901 because some people
15905 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15912 \begin_layout Labeling
15913 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15915 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
15922 This is text with emphasize on
15925 This might seem like the same as
15929 , but it is actually a bit different.
15935 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
15937 Normally this font is equal to italic.
15938 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
15942 \begin_layout Labeling
15943 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15945 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
15950 Don't use underlining.
15955 \begin_layout Labeling
15956 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15958 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
15962 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
15970 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
15972 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
15981 arg "font-underline"
15987 \begin_inset Newline newline
15991 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
15994 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
15995 when you could not change fonts.
15996 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15997 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15998 because some people
16002 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
16007 \begin_layout Labeling
16008 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16012 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
16014 \begin_inset space ~
16023 This is text with Double under
16024 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
16026 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
16035 arg "font-underunderline"
16039 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
16041 \begin_inset Newline newline
16044 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
16045 about double underbar
16050 \begin_layout Labeling
16051 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16055 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
16057 \begin_inset space ~
16066 This is text with Wavy under
16067 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
16069 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
16078 arg "font-underwave"
16082 \begin_inset Newline newline
16085 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
16086 Keep antinausea pills handy.
16087 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
16092 \begin_layout Labeling
16093 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16095 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
16100 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
16106 \begin_layout Labeling
16107 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16109 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
16114 Don't use strikethrough.
16117 \begin_layout Labeling
16118 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16122 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
16124 \begin_inset space ~
16128 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
16136 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
16138 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
16139 Single strikethrough
16147 arg "font-strikeout"
16151 \begin_inset Newline newline
16154 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
16155 changed in the meantime.
16158 \begin_layout Labeling
16159 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16161 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
16165 \begin_inset space ~
16169 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
16171 \begin_inset space ~
16175 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
16183 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
16185 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
16191 \begin_inset Newline newline
16194 This is used to make text hardly readable.
16198 \begin_layout Standard
16200 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
16201 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
16202 you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
16203 \begin_inset space ~
16207 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16209 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
16216 \begin_layout Itemize
16218 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
16225 This is text with emphasize on
16230 \begin_layout Itemize
16234 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
16241 This is text with Noun on.
16243 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
16250 , this is a logical attribute.
16251 Normally it's equivalent to
16254 \begin_inset space ~
16264 \begin_layout Standard
16265 So you have a huge number of combinations to
16266 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
16268 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
16273 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
16274 chosen a new character style
16275 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
16276 applied a text property
16279 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
16282 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
16284 \begin_inset space ~
16287 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
16289 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600703
16295 arg "dialog-show character"
16303 arg "dialog-show character"
16306 ) dialog, the settings are
16307 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
16311 You can activate the
16312 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
16314 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
16315 last applied properties
16317 by using the toolbar button
16320 arg "textstyle-apply"
16324 The button lets you apply
16325 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
16326 your custom character style
16327 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
16330 even when the dialog isn't visible.
16332 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
16333 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again, a press
16334 on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
16335 20) most recently applied settings, from which you can select one.
16340 \begin_layout Standard
16341 To completely reset the
16342 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
16344 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
16345 text properties of a selection
16347 to the default, use
16348 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
16350 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
16360 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
16365 from the menu of the toolbar button
16368 arg "textstyle-apply"
16375 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
16376 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose
16377 you just set the shape to
16378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16386 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16390 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16396 \begin_inset space ~
16410 \begin_layout Standard
16412 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16413 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
16421 \begin_inset space ~
16433 \begin_layout Itemize
16435 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16448 font, which means every character has the same width; the
16449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16466 \begin_inset Newline newline
16470 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
16473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16484 \begin_inset Note Note
16487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16488 For more on phantoms see section
16489 \begin_inset space ~
16493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16495 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
16505 \begin_inset Newline newline
16511 \begin_layout Itemize
16513 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16518 fonts use characters with serifs.
16519 These are the small
16520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16527 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
16528 The following example shows the difference:
16529 \begin_inset Newline newline
16533 \begin_inset Newline newline
16538 text without serifs
16541 \begin_inset Newline newline
16544 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
16545 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
16552 \begin_layout Itemize
16554 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16559 is not recommended for use as a base type.
16560 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
16561 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
16566 \begin_layout Standard
16568 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
16569 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16573 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16576 refers to applying or removing font properties.
16577 When a property is marked for toggling in the
16580 \begin_inset space ~
16585 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
16586 the property to be removed.
16587 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
16588 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
16589 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
16592 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16596 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16607 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
16608 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
16609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16616 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
16620 \begin_inset space ~
16625 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
16628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16636 If you, for example, set
16637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16655 \begin_inset space ~
16660 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
16662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16669 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
16674 \begin_layout Standard
16676 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
16679 with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! They are, more
16680 often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
16683 \begin_layout Section
16684 Printing and Previewing
16687 \begin_layout Subsection
16691 \begin_layout Standard
16692 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
16693 using \SpecialChar LyX
16694 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
16695 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
16696 goes on behind-the-scenes.
16697 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
16699 Additional Features
16704 \begin_layout Standard
16706 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
16709 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
16710 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
16711 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16714 is what you use to do your actual writing.
16715 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
16716 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16717 to turn your writing into printable output.
16718 This happens in two stages:
16721 \begin_layout Enumerate
16722 First, \SpecialChar LyX
16723 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
16725 a file with the extension,
16726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16740 \begin_layout Enumerate
16741 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
16742 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16743 to use the commands in the
16747 file to produce printable output.
16750 \begin_layout Subsection
16751 Output file formats
16752 \begin_inset Index idx
16755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16762 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16764 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
16771 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16772 Simple text (ASCII)
16773 \begin_inset Index idx
16776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16777 File formats ! ASCII
16785 \begin_layout Standard
16786 This file type has the extension
16787 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16799 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
16800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16803 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
16804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16810 \begin_layout Standard
16811 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
16813 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16814 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16816 \begin_inset space ~
16822 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
16823 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
16824 bibliography (section
16825 \begin_inset space ~
16829 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16831 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
16836 If your document includes such material, use
16838 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16839 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16841 \begin_inset space ~
16845 \begin_inset space ~
16849 \begin_inset space ~
16857 \begin_inset space ~
16861 \begin_inset space ~
16867 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
16868 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
16871 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16874 \begin_inset Index idx
16877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16878 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
16887 \begin_layout Standard
16888 This file type has the extension
16889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16900 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16903 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
16904 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
16905 -Errors or to process it manually
16906 with console commands.
16907 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
16908 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
16909 's temporary directory whenever you
16910 view or export your document.
16913 \begin_layout Standard
16914 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
16915 -file using the menu
16917 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16918 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16922 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
16923 export variants are explained in section
16924 \begin_inset space ~
16928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16930 reference "subsec:Export"
16937 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16939 \begin_inset Index idx
16942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16951 \begin_layout Standard
16952 This file type has the extension
16953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16973 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
16974 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
16975 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
16979 \begin_layout Standard
16980 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
16981 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
16982 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
16983 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
16984 when you view the DVI.
16985 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
16988 \begin_layout Standard
16989 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
16991 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16992 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16997 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16998 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17000 \begin_inset space ~
17006 The latter option uses the program
17008 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17014 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17017 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17018 font access (see section
17019 \begin_inset space ~
17023 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17025 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17030 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17031 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17036 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17038 \begin_inset Index idx
17041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17042 File formats ! PostScript
17050 \begin_layout Standard
17051 This file type has the extension
17052 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17060 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17064 PostScript was developed by the company
17068 as a printer language.
17069 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
17071 PostScript can be seen as a
17072 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17075 programming language
17076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17079 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
17083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17084 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17091 \begin_inset Index idx
17094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17096 packages ! pstricks
17106 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
17109 \begin_layout Standard
17110 PostScript can only contain images in the format
17111 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17114 Encapsulated PostScript
17115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17118 (EPS, file extension
17119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17131 As \SpecialChar LyX
17132 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
17133 convert them in the background to EPS.
17134 If, for example, you have 50
17135 \begin_inset space ~
17138 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
17140 \begin_inset space ~
17143 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
17144 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
17146 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
17147 EPS to avoid this problem.
17150 \begin_layout Standard
17151 You can export to PostScript using the menu
17153 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17154 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17160 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17162 \begin_inset Index idx
17165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17172 \begin_inset Index idx
17175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17184 \begin_layout Standard
17185 This file type has the extension
17186 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17202 Portable Document Format
17203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17210 was derived from PostScript.
17211 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
17213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17220 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
17221 looks exactly the same.
17224 \begin_layout Standard
17225 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
17226 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17229 Joint Photographic Experts Group
17230 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17233 (JPG, file extension
17234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17258 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17261 Portable Network Graphics
17262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17265 (PNG, file extension
17266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17278 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
17279 converts them in the
17280 background to one of these formats.
17281 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
17282 will slow down your workflow.
17283 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
17286 \begin_layout Standard
17287 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
17289 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17295 \begin_layout Description
17297 \begin_inset space ~
17300 (pdflatex) This uses the program
17304 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17307 \begin_layout Description
17309 \begin_inset space ~
17316 ) This uses the program
17318 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17321 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17324 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17327 is a new engine, derived from
17331 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
17332 access (see section
17333 \begin_inset space ~
17337 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17339 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17344 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17345 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17350 \begin_layout Description
17352 \begin_inset space ~
17359 ) This uses the program
17364 that converts your file directly to PDF.
17370 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17371 font access (see section
17372 \begin_inset space ~
17376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17378 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17383 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
17384 vertically written Japanese.
17387 \begin_layout Description
17389 \begin_inset space ~
17392 (cropped) This is the same as
17395 \begin_inset space ~
17400 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
17401 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
17402 to generate good-looking
17403 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
17406 \begin_layout Description
17408 \begin_inset space ~
17411 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
17415 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
17419 \begin_layout Description
17421 \begin_inset space ~
17424 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
17428 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
17429 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
17433 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
17434 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
17437 \begin_layout Standard
17441 \begin_inset space ~
17450 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
17451 works without problems.
17452 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
17453 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
17457 \begin_inset space ~
17465 \begin_inset space ~
17470 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
17478 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17480 \begin_inset Index idx
17483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17484 FileFormats ! XHTML
17490 \begin_inset Index idx
17493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17502 \begin_layout Standard
17503 This file type has the extension
17504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17516 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
17517 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
17518 When \SpecialChar LyX
17519 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
17520 suitable for the purpose.
17521 For the math output you can choose in the menu
17523 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17524 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17527 between different formats, which are described in section
17529 Math Output in XHTML
17534 \begin_inset space ~
17542 \begin_layout Standard
17543 XHTML output remains
17544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17548 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17551 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
17552 features are supported yet.
17556 and the World Wide Web
17560 Additional Features
17562 manual, for more information.
17565 \begin_layout Standard
17566 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
17568 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17569 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17575 \begin_layout Subsection
17577 \begin_inset Index idx
17580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17589 \begin_layout Standard
17590 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
17591 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
17600 or use the toolbar button
17607 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
17608 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
17609 \begin_inset space ~
17613 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17615 reference "sec:File-Formats"
17619 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
17621 \begin_inset space ~
17625 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17627 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
17632 Further output formats can be selected via
17634 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17635 View (Other Formats)
17637 or the toolbar button
17646 \begin_layout Standard
17647 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
17648 viewer window using the menu
17650 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17655 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17656 Update (Other Formats)
17661 \begin_layout Standard
17662 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
17665 To have a real output, export your document.
17668 \begin_layout Section
17669 A few Words about Typography
17670 \begin_inset Index idx
17673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17682 \begin_layout Subsection
17683 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
17684 \begin_inset Index idx
17687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17694 \begin_inset Index idx
17697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17706 \begin_layout Standard
17707 In \SpecialChar LyX
17709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17720 symbol comes in four variants: the
17737 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17743 \begin_layout Standard
17744 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17754 height_special "totalheight"
17759 backgroundcolor "none"
17762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17763 \begin_inset Tabular
17764 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
17765 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17766 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17767 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17768 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17769 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17770 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17798 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17799 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17829 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17838 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17839 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17861 system key combination
17865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17866 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
17869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17878 and the em dash with
17881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17894 is the Mac label for the right
17905 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17918 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17919 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17941 system key combination or
17942 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17946 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17956 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17969 \begin_inset Formula $-$
17977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18008 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18014 \begin_layout Standard
18015 Dashes can also be inserted with
18017 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18019 \begin_inset space ~
18022 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
18030 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
18031 and 2014 for the en dash).
18034 \begin_layout Standard
18035 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
18036 mode and has a length of its own.
18037 Here are some examples:
18040 \begin_layout Enumerate
18041 line- and page-breaks
18042 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18052 \begin_layout Enumerate
18054 \begin_inset space ~
18058 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18068 \begin_layout Enumerate
18069 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
18070 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18080 \begin_layout Enumerate
18081 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
18085 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18095 \begin_layout Standard
18097 \begin_inset CommandInset href
18099 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
18100 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
18108 \begin_layout Subsection
18109 Dashes and Line Breaks
18110 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18112 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
18119 \begin_layout Standard
18120 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
18121 case and locale, e.
18122 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18128 \begin_layout Itemize
18129 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
18130 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
18133 \begin_layout Itemize
18134 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
18138 \begin_layout Itemize
18139 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
18140 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
18143 \begin_layout Standard
18144 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
18145 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18156 allows line breaks after hyphens
18157 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782973
18159 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782983
18162 en-dashes and em-dashes.
18165 \begin_layout Enumerate
18166 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
18167 \begin_inset space ~
18170 – common in British English and generally recommended by
18172 The Elements of Typographic Style
18175 \begin_inset space ~
18178 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
18181 \begin_layout Enumerate
18182 Unwanted line breaks
18187 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782702
18189 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782715
18192 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
18196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18199 Prevent Hyphenation
18204 \begin_inset space ~
18220 in \SpecialChar TeX
18222 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
18223 , a protected space does not suffice
18227 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782332
18232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18234 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782431
18235 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not
18236 in the document language.
18237 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French
18251 \begin_layout Itemize
18253 \begin_inset space ~
18257 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18267 height_special "totalheight"
18272 backgroundcolor "none"
18275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18284 \begin_layout Itemize
18286 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18296 height_special "totalheight"
18301 backgroundcolor "none"
18304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18306 \begin_inset space ~
18314 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18315 \begin_inset space ~
18318 – sont très utiles.
18321 \begin_layout Itemize
18326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18335 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
18339 \begin_layout Standard
18340 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
18341 \begin_inset space ~
18344 – in contrast to an overfull line
18345 \begin_inset space ~
18348 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18352 \begin_layout Standard
18353 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
18356 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18357 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18358 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18359 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18364 \begin_layout Enumerate
18365 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
18366 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
18367 or \SpecialChar TeX
18373 \begin_layout Itemize
18375 \begin_inset space ~
18378 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18379 \begin_inset space ~
18382 – sont très utiles.
18386 \begin_layout Enumerate
18387 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
18388 \begin_inset Newline newline
18393 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18394 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18396 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913043
18398 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913043
18400 \begin_inset space ~
18406 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913068
18408 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913068
18410 \begin_inset space ~
18421 \begin_layout Itemize
18422 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18423 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18424 should be followed by
18425 a line break opportunity.
18428 \begin_layout Standard
18429 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
18430 \begin_inset space ~
18434 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18436 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18447 \begin_layout Enumerate
18448 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18449 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
18450 or en dashes (see section
18451 \begin_inset space ~
18455 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18457 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18467 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18468 Changes and backwards compatibility
18471 \begin_layout Standard
18472 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
18474 \begin_inset space ~
18477 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
18478 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
18480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18487 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
18488 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
18496 \begin_layout Standard
18497 Since \SpecialChar LyX
18499 \begin_inset space ~
18502 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18504 prevents ligation to dashes.
18506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18513 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
18518 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
18519 after the input (unless the current text font is
18527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18528 The behavior was changed since
18529 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18533 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18537 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18541 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18544 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
18545 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
18546 as non-breakable dashes.
18547 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
18556 \begin_layout Standard
18559 \begin_inset space ~
18567 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
18569 \begin_inset space ~
18572 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
18575 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18576 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18577 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18578 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18580 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
18584 If you used both literal and
18585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18592 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
18594 \begin_inset space ~
18597 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
18598 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
18601 \begin_layout Subsection
18603 \begin_inset Index idx
18606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18613 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18615 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
18622 \begin_layout Standard
18623 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
18624 but automatically in the output.
18625 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18631 \begin_inset Index idx
18634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18641 following the rules of the document language.
18643 does not hyphenate text in the
18647 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
18650 \begin_layout Standard
18652 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
18656 font and with unusual constructs, like
18657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18665 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
18666 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
18667 This is done with the menu
18669 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18670 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18672 \begin_inset space ~
18678 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18680 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18684 \begin_layout Standard
18685 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
18686 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
18688 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18697 would then see the hyphen
18698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18705 as a line break possibility.
18706 A line break at this point would look ugly.
18707 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
18710 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18711 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18714 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
18716 Prevent Hyphenation
18721 \begin_inset space ~
18729 \begin_layout Subsection
18731 \begin_inset Index idx
18734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18743 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18744 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
18745 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18747 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
18754 \begin_layout Standard
18755 When \SpecialChar LyX
18756 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
18757 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18759 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
18762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18765 appropriate amount of space.
18766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18769 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
18771 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
18772 gets after another word.
18775 \begin_layout Standard
18776 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
18777 not work in all cases.
18779 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18790 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
18791 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
18794 \begin_layout Standard
18795 Here are some examples of
18799 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
18802 \begin_layout Itemize
18807 \begin_layout Itemize
18812 \begin_layout Standard
18813 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
18816 \begin_layout Itemize
18818 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18822 this is too much space!
18825 \begin_layout Itemize
18830 \begin_layout Standard
18831 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
18834 \begin_layout Standard
18835 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
18838 \begin_layout Enumerate
18842 \begin_inset space ~
18847 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
18848 \begin_inset space ~
18852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18854 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
18859 \begin_inset Index idx
18862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18863 Spaces ! inter-word
18871 \begin_layout Enumerate
18875 \begin_inset space ~
18880 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
18881 \begin_inset space ~
18885 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18887 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
18892 \begin_inset Index idx
18895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18904 \begin_layout Enumerate
18908 \begin_inset space ~
18912 \begin_inset space ~
18916 \begin_inset space ~
18923 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18925 \begin_inset space ~
18930 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
18931 This function is also bound to
18934 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
18940 \begin_layout Standard
18941 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
18944 \begin_layout Itemize
18946 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18950 \begin_inset space \space{}
18953 this is too much space!
18956 \begin_layout Itemize
18957 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
18961 \begin_layout Standard
18962 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
18963 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
18965 will take care of this.
18968 \begin_layout Standard
18969 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
18973 \begin_inset space ~
18979 feature described in the section
18981 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
18986 Additional Features
18991 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18993 \begin_inset Index idx
18996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18997 Typography ! Quotation marks
19003 \begin_inset Index idx
19006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19007 Quotation marks | see
19011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19037 \begin_layout Standard
19039 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
19040 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
19041 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
19043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19051 The keyboard character,
19055 , generates this automatically.
19058 \begin_layout Standard
19059 You can specify what character the
19063 key produces by using the submenu
19069 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19073 \begin_inset Index idx
19076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19077 Document ! Settings
19082 dialog and switching the
19086 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
19087 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
19089 \begin_inset space ~
19095 \begin_layout Labeling
19096 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19108 \begin_inset space ~
19112 \begin_inset space ~
19116 \begin_inset Quotes els
19120 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19134 \begin_inset Quotes els
19138 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19141 quotation marks (as common, e.
19142 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19148 \begin_layout Labeling
19149 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19152 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19156 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19160 \begin_inset space ~
19164 \begin_inset space ~
19168 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19172 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19178 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19182 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19186 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19190 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19193 quotation marks (as common, e.
19194 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19200 \begin_layout Labeling
19201 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19204 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19208 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19212 \begin_inset space ~
19216 \begin_inset space ~
19220 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19224 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19230 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19234 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19238 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19242 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19245 quotation marks (as common, e.
19246 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19252 \begin_layout Labeling
19253 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19256 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19260 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19264 \begin_inset space ~
19268 \begin_inset space ~
19272 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19276 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19282 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19286 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19290 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19294 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19297 quotation marks (as common, e.
19298 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19304 \begin_layout Labeling
19305 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19308 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19312 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19316 \begin_inset space ~
19320 \begin_inset space ~
19324 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19328 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19334 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19338 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19342 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19346 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19349 quotation marks (as common, e.
19350 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19353 g., in Switzerland)
19356 \begin_layout Labeling
19357 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19360 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19364 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19368 \begin_inset space ~
19372 \begin_inset space ~
19376 \begin_inset Quotes als
19380 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19386 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19390 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19394 \begin_inset Quotes als
19398 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19401 quotation marks (as common, e.
19402 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19408 \begin_layout Labeling
19409 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19412 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19416 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19420 \begin_inset space ~
19424 \begin_inset space ~
19428 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19432 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19438 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19442 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19446 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19450 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19453 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
19456 \begin_layout Labeling
19457 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19460 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19464 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19468 \begin_inset space ~
19472 \begin_inset space ~
19476 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19480 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19486 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19490 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19494 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19498 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19501 quotation marks (as common, e.
19502 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19505 g., in Great Britain)
19508 \begin_layout Labeling
19509 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19512 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19516 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19520 \begin_inset space ~
19524 \begin_inset space ~
19528 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19532 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19538 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19542 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19546 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19550 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19553 quotation marks (as common, e.
19554 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19560 \begin_layout Labeling
19561 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19564 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19568 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19572 \begin_inset space ~
19576 \begin_inset space ~
19580 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19584 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19590 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19594 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19598 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19602 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19605 quotation marks (another style common in France)
19609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19610 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
19611 since these look identical to the inner marks.
19612 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
19613 the inner marks differ).
19621 \begin_layout Labeling
19622 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19625 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19629 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19633 \begin_inset space ~
19637 \begin_inset space ~
19641 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19645 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19651 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19655 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19659 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19663 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19666 quotation marks (as common, e.
19667 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19673 \begin_layout Labeling
19674 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19677 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19681 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19685 \begin_inset space ~
19689 \begin_inset space ~
19693 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19697 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19703 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19707 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19711 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19715 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19718 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
19721 \begin_layout Labeling
19722 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19723 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19731 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19737 \begin_inset space ~
19741 \begin_inset space ~
19747 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19755 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19759 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19763 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19767 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19771 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19774 quotation marks (as common, e.
19775 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19783 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19784 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19792 \begin_layout Labeling
19793 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19794 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19802 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19808 \begin_inset space ~
19812 \begin_inset space ~
19818 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19826 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19830 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19834 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19838 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19842 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19845 quotation marks (as common, e.
19846 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19849 g., in North Korea and China)
19853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19854 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19855 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19863 \begin_layout Standard
19864 Inner quotation marks
19868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19869 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
19870 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
19871 case (and specifically the British style shows that
19872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19879 does not necessarily mean
19880 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19888 This is why we call them
19889 \begin_inset Quotes els
19893 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19909 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
19911 \begin_inset Quotes els
19915 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19918 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
19921 arg "quote-insert inner"
19926 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19932 \begin_layout Standard
19933 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
19934 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
19935 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
19936 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
19937 If you check the setting
19939 Use dynamic quotation marks
19943 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19944 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19947 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
19948 they appear in a special color).
19949 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
19950 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
19952 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19955 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
19958 \begin_layout Standard
19959 Individual quotation marks (i.
19960 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19963 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
19964 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
19968 \begin_layout Subsection
19970 \begin_inset Index idx
19973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19974 Typography ! Ligatures
19980 \begin_inset Index idx
19983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20012 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20014 name "subsec:Ligatures"
20021 \begin_layout Standard
20022 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
20023 print them as single characters.
20024 These groups are known as
20029 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
20030 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
20032 Here are the standard ligatures:
20035 \begin_layout Itemize
20039 \begin_layout Itemize
20043 \begin_layout Itemize
20047 \begin_layout Itemize
20051 \begin_layout Itemize
20055 \begin_layout Standard
20056 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
20059 \begin_layout Standard
20060 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
20061 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
20062 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20066 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20069 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
20070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20085 To break a ligature, use
20087 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20088 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20090 \begin_inset space ~
20097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20105 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20108 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
20110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20114 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20125 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
20127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20133 \begin_layout Subsection
20135 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
20137 \begin_inset Index idx
20140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20150 \begin_layout Standard
20153 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20154 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
20158 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
20161 \begin_layout Description
20163 The name of the game.
20166 \begin_layout Description
20168 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
20172 \begin_layout Description
20174 The \SpecialChar TeX
20175 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
20179 \begin_layout Description
20180 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
20181 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20185 \begin_layout Standard
20186 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20188 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20192 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
20196 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20200 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
20201 world to give programs geek version numbers.
20202 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
20203 converges to the number
20204 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
20207 : The actual version is
20208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20213 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20216 , the previous one was
20217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20222 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20228 \begin_layout Subsection
20230 \begin_inset Index idx
20233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20242 \begin_layout Standard
20243 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
20244 space between two words.
20245 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
20248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20255 for units use the menu
20257 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20258 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20260 \begin_inset space ~
20268 arg "space-insert thin"
20274 \begin_layout Standard
20275 Here is an example to show the differences:
20278 \begin_layout Standard
20279 \begin_inset Tabular
20280 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
20281 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20282 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20283 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20290 \begin_inset space ~
20294 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20306 space between number and unit
20313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20318 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20322 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20334 half space between number and unit
20347 \begin_layout Subsection
20349 \begin_inset Index idx
20352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20353 Typography ! Widows and orphans
20361 \begin_layout Standard
20362 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
20364 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
20365 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
20366 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
20367 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
20368 These bits of text became known as
20379 \begin_layout Standard
20380 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
20381 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
20382 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
20383 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
20384 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
20385 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
20386 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
20387 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
20388 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
20389 \begin_inset Newline newline
20397 \begin_inset Newline newline
20405 \begin_inset Newline newline
20408 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20409 preamble of your document to avoid them.
20410 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
20412 \begin_inset space ~
20416 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20418 key "latexcompanion"
20424 \begin_inset space ~
20428 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20435 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20436 's page break mechanism.
20439 \begin_layout Chapter
20440 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
20441 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20443 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
20450 \begin_layout Standard
20451 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
20454 \begin_inset space ~
20460 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
20463 \begin_layout Section
20465 \begin_inset Index idx
20468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20475 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20484 \begin_layout Standard
20486 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
20489 \begin_layout Description
20492 \begin_inset space ~
20495 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
20496 \begin_inset Newline newline
20500 \begin_inset Note Note
20503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20504 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
20512 \begin_layout Description
20513 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
20514 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
20515 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
20518 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20519 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20521 \begin_inset space ~
20527 \begin_inset Newline newline
20531 \begin_inset Note Comment
20534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20535 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
20544 \begin_layout Description
20546 \begin_inset space ~
20549 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
20550 set in the document settings under
20552 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
20554 \begin_inset space ~
20560 \begin_inset Newline newline
20564 \begin_inset Newline newline
20568 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20577 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
20578 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
20583 of a comment that appears in the output.
20589 \begin_inset Newline newline
20593 \begin_inset Newline newline
20596 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
20599 \begin_layout Standard
20600 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
20608 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20612 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
20615 \begin_layout Section
20617 \begin_inset Index idx
20620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20627 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20629 name "sec:Footnotes"
20636 \begin_layout Standard
20638 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
20641 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20644 or the toolbar button
20647 arg "footnote-insert"
20659 \begin_inset Graphics
20660 filename clipart/footnote.png
20669 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20670 's representation of your footnote.
20680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20699 label, the box will
20703 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
20704 Clicking on the box label again will close
20717 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
20718 and click on the footnote
20733 \begin_layout Standard
20734 Here is an example footnote:
20742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20743 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
20751 \begin_layout Standard
20752 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
20753 position where the footnote box is placed.
20754 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
20755 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
20756 according to the document class.
20758 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
20759 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20765 ey are described in the
20768 \begin_inset space ~
20776 \begin_layout Section
20778 \begin_inset Index idx
20781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20788 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20790 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
20797 \begin_layout Standard
20798 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
20800 When you insert a margin note via the menu
20802 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20804 \begin_inset space ~
20809 or the toolbar button
20812 arg "marginalnote-insert"
20831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20838 appearing within your text.
20839 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20840 's representation of your margin
20849 \begin_layout Standard
20850 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
20854 \begin_inset Marginal
20857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20859 This is a marginal note.
20867 \begin_layout Standard
20868 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
20869 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
20870 pages, right on odd pages.
20873 \begin_layout Standard
20874 For further information about marginal notes see the section
20877 \begin_inset space ~
20885 \begin_inset space ~
20893 \begin_layout Section
20894 Graphics and Images
20895 \begin_inset Index idx
20898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20905 \begin_inset Index idx
20908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20915 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20917 name "sec:Graphics"
20924 \begin_layout Standard
20925 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
20926 you want and click on the toolbar icon
20929 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
20934 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20938 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
20941 \begin_layout Standard
20942 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
20947 tab allows you to choose your image file.
20948 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
20950 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
20951 \begin_inset space ~
20955 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20957 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
20964 \begin_layout Standard
20969 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
20970 of the image in the output.
20971 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
20975 \begin_inset space ~
20979 \begin_inset space ~
20988 \begin_inset space ~
20992 \begin_inset space ~
20996 \begin_inset space ~
21001 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
21002 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
21010 \begin_layout Standard
21014 \begin_inset space ~
21018 \begin_inset space ~
21023 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
21024 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
21026 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
21031 \begin_inset space ~
21036 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
21037 with the image size is printed.
21040 \begin_layout Standard
21041 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
21042 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
21044 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
21047 \begin_layout Standard
21049 \begin_inset Graphics
21050 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
21058 \begin_layout Standard
21059 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
21060 the image into a float, see section
21061 \begin_inset space ~
21065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21067 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
21074 \begin_layout Subsection
21076 \begin_inset Index idx
21079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21086 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21088 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
21095 \begin_layout Standard
21096 You can insert images in any known file format.
21097 But as we explained in section
21098 \begin_inset space ~
21102 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21104 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
21108 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
21110 therefore uses the program
21114 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
21115 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
21116 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
21117 \begin_inset space ~
21121 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21123 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
21130 \begin_layout Standard
21131 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
21134 \begin_layout Description
21136 \begin_inset space ~
21139 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
21140 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
21141 Well-known bitmap image formats are
21142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21145 Graphics Interchange Format
21146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21149 (GIF, file extension
21150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21158 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21162 \begin_inset Index idx
21165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21197 Portable Network Graphics
21198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21201 (PNG, file extension
21202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21210 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21214 \begin_inset Index idx
21217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21249 Joint Photographic Experts Group
21250 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21253 (JPG, file extension
21254 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21278 \begin_inset Index idx
21281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21312 \begin_layout Description
21314 \begin_inset space ~
21317 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
21319 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
21320 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
21321 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
21322 \begin_inset Newline newline
21325 Scalable image formats can be
21326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21329 Scalable Vector Graphics
21330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21333 (SVG, file extension
21334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21346 \begin_inset Index idx
21349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21381 Encapsulated PostScript
21382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21385 (EPS, file extension
21386 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21398 \begin_inset Index idx
21401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21433 Portable Document Format
21434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21437 (PDF, file extension
21438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21450 \begin_inset Index idx
21453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21468 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
21469 result will not be scalable.
21470 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
21475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21476 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
21484 \begin_layout Standard
21485 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
21492 \begin_layout Subsection
21493 Grouping of Image Settings
21494 \begin_inset Index idx
21497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21498 Images ! Settings grouping
21506 \begin_layout Standard
21507 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
21509 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
21510 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
21512 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
21513 need to manually change each of them.
21517 \begin_layout Standard
21518 A new group can be set by pressing the button
21521 \begin_inset space ~
21525 \begin_inset space ~
21537 \begin_inset space ~
21541 \begin_inset space ~
21547 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
21548 and checking the name of the desired group.
21551 \begin_layout Section
21553 \begin_inset Index idx
21556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21563 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21572 \begin_layout Standard
21573 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
21576 arg "tabular-insert"
21581 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21585 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns
21586 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288358
21587 , and you can select a specific (border) style
21590 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
21591 from the rest of the table.
21592 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
21593 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
21595 Here is an example table:
21598 \begin_layout Standard
21600 \begin_inset Tabular
21601 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
21602 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21603 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21604 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21605 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21606 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21804 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288479
21808 \begin_layout Standard
21810 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288540
21811 This corresponds to the
21812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21816 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21819 table style listed in the style selection.
21822 \begin_layout Standard
21824 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288387
21825 Other available styles include:
21828 \begin_layout Itemize
21830 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288551
21832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21839 which looks line the above table, but without the first row being separated
21843 \begin_layout Itemize
21845 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288764
21846 a border-less table with no lines at all,
21849 \begin_layout Itemize
21851 \change_inserted -712698321 1554289543
21853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21860 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and
21861 bold top/bottom lines (see
21872 \begin_layout Standard
21874 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288823
21875 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar
21876 button can be changed in
21878 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
21879 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
21883 So if the default style above is not the one you need, you should alter
21887 \begin_layout Subsection
21891 \begin_layout Standard
21892 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
21895 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
21899 This brings up the table dialog.
21900 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
21901 cursor is placed currently.
21902 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
21903 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
21904 done on all of your selection.
21907 \begin_layout Standard
21908 In addition to the table dialog, the
21911 \begin_inset space ~
21916 helps you in setting table properties.
21917 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
21920 \begin_layout Standard
21924 \begin_inset space ~
21929 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
21930 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
21931 current cell respectively.
21932 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
21934 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
21935 of text, see section
21936 \begin_inset space ~
21940 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21942 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
21949 \begin_layout Standard
21950 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
21951 using the check box
21960 This will merge the cells to
21964 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
21965 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
21966 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
21967 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
21968 in the last row without the upper border:
21971 \begin_layout Standard
21973 \begin_inset Tabular
21974 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
21975 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
21976 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21977 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
21978 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21979 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21990 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21999 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22075 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22110 \begin_layout Standard
22111 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
22112 -arguments for the table.
22113 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
22114 explained in the chapter
22121 \begin_inset space ~
22127 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
22128 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
22129 but are visible in the output.
22132 \begin_layout Standard
22133 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
22136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22141 Most DVI-viewers are
22145 able to display rotations.
22153 \begin_layout Standard
22158 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
22163 adds lines for all cell borders.
22166 \begin_layout Subsection
22168 \begin_inset Index idx
22171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22172 Tables ! Multi-page
22178 \begin_inset Index idx
22181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22190 \begin_layout Standard
22191 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
22194 \begin_inset space ~
22198 \begin_inset space ~
22206 \begin_inset space ~
22211 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
22212 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
22215 \begin_layout Description
22220 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22221 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
22222 Except for the first page, if
22225 \begin_inset space ~
22233 \begin_layout Description
22237 \begin_inset space ~
22242 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22243 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
22246 \begin_layout Description
22251 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22252 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
22253 except for the last page, if
22256 \begin_inset space ~
22264 \begin_layout Description
22268 \begin_inset space ~
22273 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22274 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
22277 \begin_layout Description
22278 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
22279 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
22281 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22285 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
22288 \begin_inset space ~
22296 \begin_layout Standard
22297 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
22298 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
22299 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
22305 In this context, first means first in this order:
22308 \begin_inset space ~
22320 \begin_inset space ~
22325 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
22328 \begin_layout Standard
22330 \begin_inset Tabular
22331 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
22332 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
22333 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
22334 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22335 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22336 <row endfirsthead="true">
22337 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22343 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
22348 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22357 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22367 <row endfirsthead="true">
22368 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22379 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22388 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22400 <row endhead="true">
22401 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22412 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22421 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22431 <row endhead="true">
22432 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22443 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22452 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22464 <row endfoot="true">
22465 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22476 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22485 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22516 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23457 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23466 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
23469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23475 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23486 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23517 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23548 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23579 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23610 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23641 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23672 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23703 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23734 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23765 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23796 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23827 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23858 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23889 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23920 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23951 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23982 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24013 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24044 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24075 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24106 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24137 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24168 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24199 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24230 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24261 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24292 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24323 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24354 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24385 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24416 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24446 <row endlastfoot="true">
24447 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24458 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
24461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24467 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24484 \begin_layout Subsection
24486 \begin_inset Index idx
24489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24496 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24498 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
24505 \begin_layout Standard
24506 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
24507 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
24508 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
24509 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
24513 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
24516 \begin_layout Standard
24517 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
24518 for the column in the table dialog.
24519 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
24520 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
24524 \begin_layout Standard
24526 \begin_inset Tabular
24527 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
24528 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24529 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24530 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
24531 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24551 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24620 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24676 This is longer now.
24681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24732 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24733 This is longer now.
24738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24764 \begin_layout Standard
24765 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
24766 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
24770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24771 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
24772 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
24778 Selection with the mouse or with
24782 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
24783 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
24784 the selection from outside the table.
24787 \begin_layout Section
24789 \begin_inset Index idx
24792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24799 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24808 \begin_layout Subsection
24812 \begin_layout Standard
24813 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
24814 have a fixed location.
24816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24823 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
24831 \begin_inset space ~
24836 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
24837 too many notes on the current page.
24840 \begin_layout Standard
24841 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
24842 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
24843 and pages without text.
24844 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
24845 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
24846 Floats are therefore numbered.
24847 Referencing is described in section
24848 \begin_inset space ~
24852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24854 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24861 \begin_layout Standard
24862 To insert a float, use the menu
24864 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24868 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
24869 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
24871 After the label you can insert the caption text.
24872 \begin_inset Index idx
24875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24881 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
24882 paragraph within the float.
24883 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
24884 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
24885 left-clicking on the box label.
24886 A closed float box looks like this:
24887 \begin_inset Graphics
24888 filename clipart/float.png
24893 – a gray button with a red label.
24896 \begin_layout Standard
24897 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
24899 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
24902 \begin_layout Subsection
24904 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24906 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
24911 \begin_inset Index idx
24914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24915 Floats ! Figure floats
24923 \begin_layout Standard
24925 \begin_inset space ~
24929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24931 reference "fig:A-star-in"
24935 was created using the menu
24937 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24938 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
24944 arg "float-insert figure"
24948 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
24951 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24957 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
24961 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
24962 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
24964 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24966 \begin_inset space ~
24974 arg "layout-paragraph"
24980 \begin_layout Standard
24981 \begin_inset Float figure
24988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24990 \begin_inset Graphics
24991 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25001 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25004 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25006 name "fig:A-star-in"
25023 \begin_layout Standard
25024 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
25025 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
25027 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25036 ) and refer to it using the menu
25038 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25044 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25048 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
25049 vague references like
25050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25057 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
25058 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
25060 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25064 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25068 For more about cross-references, see section
25069 \begin_inset space ~
25073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25075 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25082 \begin_layout Standard
25083 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
25084 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
25085 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
25086 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
25087 as described in section
25088 \begin_inset space ~
25092 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25094 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
25100 \begin_inset space ~
25104 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25106 reference "fig:Two-images"
25110 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
25111 You can also set the images one below the other.
25113 \begin_inset space ~
25117 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25119 reference "fig:Undefinable"
25124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25126 reference "fig:Star"
25130 are the subfigures.
25133 \begin_layout Standard
25134 \begin_inset Float figure
25141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25142 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25146 \begin_inset Float figure
25153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25154 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25157 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25159 name "fig:Undefinable"
25171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25172 \begin_inset Graphics
25173 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
25185 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25189 \begin_inset Float figure
25196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25197 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25200 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25215 \begin_inset Graphics
25216 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25228 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25235 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25238 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25240 name "fig:Two-images"
25257 \begin_layout Subsection
25259 \begin_inset Index idx
25262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25263 Floats ! Table floats
25271 \begin_layout Standard
25272 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
25274 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25275 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25278 or the toolbar button
25281 arg "float-insert table"
25285 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
25286 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
25287 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
25289 \begin_inset space ~
25293 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25295 reference "tab:Table-float"
25302 \begin_layout Standard
25303 \begin_inset Float table
25310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25311 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25314 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25316 name "tab:Table-float"
25328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25330 \begin_inset Tabular
25331 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
25332 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25333 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25334 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25335 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25462 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
25470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25483 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25486 \end{array}\right]$
25494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25507 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
25528 \begin_layout Subsection
25530 \begin_inset Index idx
25533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25542 \begin_layout Standard
25544 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
25545 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
25546 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
25548 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
25556 \begin_inset space ~
25564 \begin_layout Section
25566 \begin_inset Index idx
25569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25578 \begin_layout Standard
25580 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
25582 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
25583 \begin_inset space \space{}
25590 \begin_layout Standard
25591 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
25592 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
25594 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25598 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
25599 and its alignment within the page.
25602 \begin_layout Standard
25604 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25614 height_special "totalheight"
25619 backgroundcolor "none"
25622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25625 This is a minipage.
25626 The text is set in an italic style.
25629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25632 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
25633 another formatting.
25641 \begin_layout Standard
25642 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25645 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
25649 as described in section
25650 \begin_inset space ~
25654 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25656 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
25661 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25667 \begin_layout Standard
25668 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25678 height_special "totalheight"
25683 backgroundcolor "none"
25686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25687 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25688 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25694 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25698 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25708 height_special "totalheight"
25713 backgroundcolor "none"
25716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25717 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25718 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25726 \begin_layout Standard
25727 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25733 \begin_layout Standard
25734 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
25736 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
25743 \begin_inset space ~
25751 \begin_layout Chapter
25752 Mathematical Formulas
25753 \begin_inset Index idx
25756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25763 \begin_inset Index idx
25766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25795 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25797 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
25804 \begin_layout Standard
25805 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
25810 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
25813 \begin_layout Section
25815 \begin_inset Index idx
25818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25827 \begin_layout Standard
25828 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
25841 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
25843 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
25844 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
25845 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
25847 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25853 \begin_layout Standard
25854 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
25858 \begin_inset space ~
25863 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
25866 \begin_layout Standard
25867 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
25868 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
25871 \begin_layout Standard
25872 This is a line with an inline formula
25873 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
25879 \begin_layout Standard
25880 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
25881 paragraph, like this one:
25882 \begin_inset Formula
25889 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
25892 \begin_layout Standard
25894 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
25896 For example, typing
25897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25910 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
25911 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
25915 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
25918 \begin_inset space ~
25926 \begin_layout Subsection
25927 Navigating in Formulas
25928 \begin_inset Index idx
25931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25940 \begin_layout Standard
25941 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
25942 achieved with the arrow keys.
25944 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
25945 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
25950 will leave a formula construct (a square root
25951 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
25955 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
25959 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25962 \end{array}\right]$
25970 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
25975 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
25976 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
25979 \begin_layout Standard
25984 , printed in this document as
25985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25989 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25993 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25996 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
25997 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
25998 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
26003 For example, if you want
26004 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
26012 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26022 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26026 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26031 , since in the latter case only the
26034 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
26039 will be under the square root sign:
26040 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
26046 \begin_layout Standard
26047 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
26049 \begin_inset Formula
26051 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
26060 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
26061 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
26064 \begin_layout Subsection
26068 \begin_layout Standard
26069 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
26070 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
26074 and a cursor movement key to select text.
26075 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
26076 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
26077 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
26078 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
26082 \begin_layout Subsection
26083 Exponents and Subscripts
26084 \begin_inset Index idx
26087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26094 \begin_inset Index idx
26097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26106 \begin_layout Standard
26107 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
26110 arg "math-superscript"
26116 arg "math-subscript"
26119 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
26121 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
26124 , type in a formula
26127 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26137 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
26143 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
26147 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
26153 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26159 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
26161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26165 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26168 , you have to use an extra
26172 to separate the circumflex and the character.
26173 For example, if you want
26174 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
26180 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26186 Subscripts are similar: To get
26187 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
26193 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26201 \begin_layout Subsection
26203 \begin_inset Index idx
26206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26215 \begin_layout Standard
26216 Create a fraction either with the command
26222 or by using the icon
26225 arg "math-insert \\frac"
26231 \begin_inset space ~
26237 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
26238 The cursor is above the fraction line.
26239 To move it to the bottom, simply press
26244 To move back up, press
26249 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
26250 \begin_inset Formula
26252 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
26255 \end{array}\right)}\right]
26263 \begin_layout Subsection
26265 \begin_inset Index idx
26268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26277 \begin_layout Standard
26278 Roots can be created using the
26281 \begin_inset space ~
26289 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
26295 arg "math-insert \\root"
26317 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
26323 always produces a square root.
26326 \begin_layout Subsection
26327 Operators with Limits
26328 \begin_inset Index idx
26331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26338 \begin_inset Index idx
26341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26348 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26350 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26357 \begin_layout Standard
26359 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
26363 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
26366 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
26367 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
26368 by entering them as you would enter a super-
26369 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
26370 The sum operator will automatically place its
26371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26378 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
26380 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
26384 \begin_inset Formula
26386 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
26391 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
26395 \begin_layout Standard
26396 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
26398 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
26399 behind the operator and using the menu
26401 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26402 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26404 \begin_inset space ~
26408 \begin_inset space ~
26422 \begin_layout Standard
26423 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
26424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26432 \begin_inset Index idx
26435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26442 \begin_inset Formula
26444 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
26449 which will place the
26450 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
26454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26458 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26462 In inline formulas it looks like this:
26463 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
26469 \begin_layout Standard
26470 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
26477 Have a look at section
26478 \begin_inset space ~
26482 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26484 reference "subsec:Functions"
26488 for an explanation of function macros.
26491 \begin_layout Subsection
26493 \begin_inset Index idx
26496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26505 \begin_layout Standard
26506 Most math symbols can be found in the
26509 \begin_inset space ~
26514 under one of several categories; including
26531 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
26535 \begin_layout Standard
26536 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26537 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
26538 don't have to use the
26541 \begin_inset space ~
26546 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
26548 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
26551 \begin_layout Subsection
26553 \begin_inset Index idx
26556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26565 \begin_layout Standard
26566 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
26572 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
26578 \begin_inset space ~
26586 arg "math-insert \\space"
26590 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
26591 For example, the sequence
26596 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
26599 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26601 \begin_inset Graphics
26602 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
26607 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
26608 the space marker and enter space again several times.
26609 With every space enter the size will be changed.
26610 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
26611 , because they are negative
26613 Here are two examples:
26616 \begin_layout Standard
26626 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
26632 \begin_layout Standard
26642 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
26648 \begin_layout Subsection
26650 \begin_inset Index idx
26653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26660 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26662 name "subsec:Functions"
26669 \begin_layout Standard
26673 \begin_inset space ~
26678 contains under the button
26681 arg "math-insert \\functions"
26684 a number of function macros, such as
26685 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
26689 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
26697 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
26704 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
26705 avoid confusions, because
26706 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
26710 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
26716 \begin_layout Standard
26717 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
26719 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
26723 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
26729 \begin_layout Standard
26730 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
26731 are placed, as described in section
26732 \begin_inset space ~
26736 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26738 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26745 \begin_layout Subsection
26747 \begin_inset Index idx
26750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26759 \begin_layout Standard
26760 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
26762 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
26763 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
26764 commands, for example, to enter
26765 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26768 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
26769 Our example is entered by typing
26774 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26781 \begin_inset space ~
26785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26787 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
26791 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
26794 \begin_layout Standard
26795 \begin_inset Float table
26802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26803 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26806 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26808 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
26812 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
26820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26822 \begin_inset Tabular
26823 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
26824 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26825 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26826 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26827 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26911 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26965 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
26975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27019 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
27029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27073 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
27083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27127 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
27137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27181 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
27191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27235 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
27245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27289 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
27299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27343 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
27353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27388 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
27409 \begin_layout Standard
27410 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
27413 \begin_inset space ~
27421 arg "math-insert \\hat"
27424 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
27428 \begin_layout Section
27429 Brackets and Delimiters
27430 \begin_inset Index idx
27433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27440 \begin_inset Index idx
27443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27450 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27452 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27459 \begin_layout Standard
27460 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
27462 For some purposes, using just the keys
27467 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
27468 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
27469 toolbar delimiter icon
27472 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27476 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
27477 \begin_inset Formula
27479 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
27487 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
27488 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
27492 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27495 and the expression on the right was entered using the
27501 \begin_inset Formula
27503 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
27511 \begin_layout Standard
27512 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
27513 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
27517 \begin_layout Standard
27518 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
27519 left side and right side.
27520 If you use the option
27523 \begin_inset space ~
27528 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
27529 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
27531 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
27536 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
27537 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
27540 \begin_layout Standard
27541 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
27542 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
27543 is to go inside the brackets.
27544 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
27549 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
27550 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
27551 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
27555 arg "math-delim ( )"
27561 \begin_layout Section
27562 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
27563 \begin_inset Index idx
27566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27573 \begin_inset Index idx
27576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27583 \begin_inset Index idx
27586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27587 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27595 \begin_layout Standard
27596 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
27600 \begin_inset space ~
27608 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
27612 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
27613 Here is an example:
27614 \begin_inset Formula
27616 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
27625 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
27626 \begin_inset space ~
27630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27632 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27637 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
27638 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
27639 This alignment is set in the box
27644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27676 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27693 for every column as default.
27694 For example, the sequence
27695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27703 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27706 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
27707 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
27708 corresponds to the relevant column.
27709 The result will look like this:
27710 \begin_inset Formula
27713 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
27714 column & has & has\,right\\
27715 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
27724 \begin_layout Standard
27725 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
27728 arg "newline-insert newline"
27731 while the cursor is in the matrix.
27732 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
27734 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27737 or the math toolbar.
27740 \begin_layout Standard
27741 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
27742 It can be created with the menu
27744 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27745 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27747 \begin_inset space ~
27759 Here is an example:
27760 \begin_inset Formula
27774 \begin_layout Standard
27775 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27778 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
27781 arg "newline-insert newline"
27785 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
27790 arg "newline-insert newline"
27793 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
27794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27801 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
27802 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
27803 A new row is created by every further entry of
27806 arg "newline-insert newline"
27810 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
27811 Here is an example:
27812 \begin_inset Formula
27814 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
27815 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
27820 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
27821 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
27822 \begin_inset Formula
27824 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
27832 \begin_layout Standard
27833 The multi-line formula type described here is called
27840 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
27841 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
27842 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27844 reference "eq:asquared"
27849 The other types are described in section
27850 \begin_inset space ~
27854 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27856 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27863 \begin_layout Section
27864 Formula Numbering and Referencing
27865 \begin_inset Index idx
27868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27869 Math ! Formula numbering
27875 \begin_inset Index idx
27878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27879 Math ! Referencing formulas
27885 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27887 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27894 \begin_layout Standard
27895 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
27897 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27898 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27900 \begin_inset space ~
27904 \begin_inset space ~
27912 arg "math-number-toggle"
27916 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27917 within parentheses.
27918 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
27919 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
27920 the document class.
27921 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
27922 separated by a dot:
27923 \begin_inset Formula
27933 arg "math-number-toggle"
27936 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
27937 You can only number displayed formulas.
27940 \begin_layout Standard
27941 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
27943 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27944 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27946 \begin_inset space ~
27950 \begin_inset space ~
27958 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
27961 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
27962 \begin_inset Formula
27965 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
27971 To number all lines use the shortcut
27974 arg "math-number-toggle"
27980 \begin_layout Standard
27981 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27984 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
27985 A label is inserted with the menu
27987 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27996 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
27997 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
27998 It is recommended that you use the suggested
27999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28007 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28010 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
28011 label type when you have many labels in your document.
28012 We inserted in the following example the label
28013 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28017 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28020 in the second line:
28021 \begin_inset Formula
28023 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
28024 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
28029 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
28030 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
28031 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
28033 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28035 \begin_inset space ~
28043 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28047 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
28048 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28049 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
28050 as the formula number:
28053 \begin_layout Standard
28054 This is a cross-reference to equation (
28055 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28057 reference "eq:tanhExp"
28064 \begin_layout Standard
28065 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
28066 's cross-reference box are described in section
28067 \begin_inset space ~
28071 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28073 reference "sec:Cross-References"
28078 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
28086 \begin_layout Section
28087 User defined math macros
28088 \begin_inset Index idx
28091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28100 \begin_layout Standard
28102 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
28103 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
28104 Math macros are explained in section
28107 \begin_inset space ~
28119 \begin_layout Section
28123 \begin_layout Subsection
28125 \begin_inset Index idx
28128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28137 \begin_layout Standard
28138 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
28139 To set a font in a formula, use the
28142 \begin_inset space ~
28150 arg "math-insert \\font"
28153 , or enter its command, listed in table
28154 \begin_inset space ~
28158 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28160 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28167 \begin_layout Standard
28168 \begin_inset Float table
28175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28176 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28179 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28181 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28185 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
28193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28195 \begin_inset Tabular
28196 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="2">
28197 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
28198 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28199 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28231 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
28239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28258 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
28266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28285 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
28293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28318 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
28326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28345 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
28353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28367 <row change="inserted 5863344 1592055455">
28368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28373 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
28374 \begin_inset Formula $\mathds{DOUBLESTROKE}$
28382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28387 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
28399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28403 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
28411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28437 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
28445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28459 <row change="inserted -131811572 1591595416">
28460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28465 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
28473 \begin_inset Formula $\mathscr{SCRIPT}$
28481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28486 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
28498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28502 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
28510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28536 \begin_layout Standard
28537 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28545 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
28548 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055666
28550 \change_deleted -131811572 1591595671
28554 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595667
28573 \begin_layout Standard
28574 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
28575 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
28580 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
28581 space when you need a space in the box.
28582 Here is an example where
28583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28594 denotes the set of numbers:
28595 \begin_inset Formula
28597 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
28605 \begin_layout Standard
28606 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
28607 You can, for example, put a character in
28616 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
28620 \begin_inset Newline newline
28623 So it is better not to use this feature.
28626 \begin_layout Standard
28627 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
28628 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
28632 \begin_inset Newline newline
28635 You can only print them emboldened using the command
28641 , which works like the other typeface commands:
28642 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
28648 \begin_layout Standard
28655 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
28658 \begin_layout Standard
28659 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
28661 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28662 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28664 \begin_inset space ~
28672 \begin_layout Subsection
28674 \begin_inset Index idx
28677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28686 \begin_layout Standard
28687 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
28689 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
28693 \begin_inset space ~
28697 \begin_inset space ~
28705 \begin_inset space ~
28713 arg "math-insert \\font"
28717 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28718 in black instead of blue.
28719 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
28720 Here is an example:
28721 \begin_inset Formula
28724 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
28725 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
28734 \begin_layout Subsection
28736 \begin_inset Index idx
28739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28748 \begin_layout Standard
28749 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
28750 automatically chosen in most situations.
28768 For most characters,
28776 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
28777 and certain other structures, are set larger in
28782 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
28783 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
28784 thinks are appropriate.
28785 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
28788 arg "math-insert \\style"
28792 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
28793 For example, you can set
28794 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
28797 , which is normally in
28806 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
28810 The four styles are used in the following example:
28813 \begin_layout Standard
28814 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
28818 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
28822 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
28826 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
28832 \begin_layout Standard
28833 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
28834 is set in a particular size with the menu
28836 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28838 \begin_inset space ~
28843 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
28844 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
28845 will be adjusted to correspond.
28846 As an example here is a formula in the font size
28847 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28851 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28857 \begin_layout Standard
28861 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
28867 \begin_layout Section
28868 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28870 \begin_inset Index idx
28873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28880 \begin_inset Index idx
28883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28892 \begin_layout Standard
28894 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
28895 that are in common use.
28898 \begin_layout Subsection
28899 Enabling AMS-Support
28902 \begin_layout Standard
28903 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
28904 the document by selecting the checkbox
28907 \begin_inset space ~
28911 \begin_inset space ~
28915 \begin_inset space ~
28922 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28926 \begin_inset Index idx
28929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28930 Document ! Settings
28938 \begin_inset space ~
28944 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28945 -errors in formulas,
28946 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
28949 \begin_layout Subsection
28951 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28953 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
28958 \begin_inset Index idx
28961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28962 Math ! Multi-line Equations
28970 \begin_layout Standard
28971 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28972 provides a selection of different formula types.
28974 allows you to choose between
28995 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
28996 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29003 , for an explanation of these formula types.
29006 \begin_layout Chapter
29010 \begin_layout Section
29012 \begin_inset Index idx
29015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29022 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29024 name "sec:Cross-References"
29031 \begin_layout Standard
29032 One of \SpecialChar LyX
29033 's strengths is cross-references.
29034 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
29036 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
29037 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
29038 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
29041 \begin_layout Enumerate
29045 \begin_layout Enumerate
29046 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29048 name "enu:Second-item"
29055 \begin_layout Enumerate
29059 \begin_layout Standard
29060 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
29062 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29065 or by pressing the toolbar button
29072 A gray label box like this:
29073 \begin_inset Graphics
29074 filename clipart/label.png
29078 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
29080 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
29082 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29115 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
29116 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
29118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29132 \begin_layout Standard
29133 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
29135 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29138 or the toolbar button
29141 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
29145 A gray cross-reference box like this:
29146 \begin_inset Graphics
29147 filename clipart/reference.png
29151 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
29153 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
29154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29166 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
29170 \begin_layout Standard
29171 As an alternative to
29173 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29176 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
29181 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
29182 to the actual cursor position via the menu
29184 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29196 \begin_layout Standard
29197 Here is our cross-reference: Item
29198 \begin_inset space ~
29202 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29204 reference "enu:Second-item"
29211 \begin_layout Standard
29212 It is recommended to use a protected space
29216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29217 described in section
29218 \begin_inset space ~
29222 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29224 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
29233 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
29234 line breaks between them.
29237 \begin_layout Standard
29238 There are eight formats of cross-references:
29241 \begin_layout Description
29242 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
29243 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29245 reference "fig:Two-images"
29252 \begin_layout Description
29253 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
29254 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
29256 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29260 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29264 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29266 reference "eq:tanhExp"
29273 \begin_layout Description
29274 <page>: prints the page number: Page
29275 \begin_inset space ~
29279 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29280 LatexCommand pageref
29281 reference "fig:Two-images"
29288 \begin_layout Description
29290 \begin_inset space ~
29294 \begin_inset space ~
29297 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
29298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29299 LatexCommand vpageref
29300 reference "fig:Two-images"
29305 \begin_inset Newline newline
29308 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
29309 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
29310 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
29311 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
29312 it prints “on the next page”.
29313 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
29316 \begin_layout Description
29318 \begin_inset space ~
29322 \begin_inset space ~
29326 \begin_inset space ~
29329 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
29330 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29332 reference "fig:Two-images"
29337 \begin_inset Newline newline
29340 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
29346 ; otherwise it behaves like
29350 \begin_inset space ~
29354 \begin_inset space ~
29363 \begin_layout Description
29365 \begin_inset space ~
29368 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
29369 \begin_inset Newline newline
29373 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29381 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29391 \begin_inset Index idx
29394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29396 packages ! prettyref
29402 \begin_inset Index idx
29405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29407 packages ! refstyle
29418 \begin_inset Newline newline
29421 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
29422 -package should be used for this feature by setting
29425 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
29429 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29430 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29438 is the default and preferred because
29442 supports only English documents.
29443 The format is specified by using the command
29455 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29456 preamble of the document.
29457 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
29459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29467 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29475 \begin_inset Newline newline
29482 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
29487 \begin_inset Newline newline
29498 predefines reference formats for all available types.
29499 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
29501 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
29502 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
29507 , you might do so as follows:
29508 \begin_inset Newline newline
29515 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
29520 \begin_inset Newline newline
29523 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
29524 the package documentation
29525 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29527 key "prettyref,refstyle"
29533 \begin_inset Newline newline
29544 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
29551 \begin_layout Description
29553 \begin_inset space ~
29556 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
29557 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29558 LatexCommand nameref
29559 reference "fig:Two-images"
29566 \begin_layout Description
29568 \begin_inset space ~
29571 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29572 label for the reference:
29573 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29574 LatexCommand labelonly
29575 reference "fig:Two-images"
29580 \begin_inset Newline newline
29583 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
29584 Code, if you want to issue a command
29585 that \SpecialChar LyX
29591 , then you may want to use the
29594 \begin_inset space ~
29599 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
29601 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29605 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29609 This is the form needed for e.
29610 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29614 \begin_inset space \space{}
29621 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
29622 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
29624 The varieties are adjusted in the field
29628 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
29632 \begin_layout Standard
29633 You can only use the style
29637 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
29641 is always possible.
29644 \begin_layout Standard
29645 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
29646 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
29648 Referencing formulas is explained in section
29649 \begin_inset space ~
29653 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29655 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
29662 \begin_layout Standard
29663 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
29667 \begin_inset space ~
29671 \begin_inset space ~
29676 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
29677 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
29680 \begin_inset space ~
29685 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
29686 You can also go back with the toolbar button
29689 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
29695 \begin_layout Standard
29696 You can change labels at any time.
29697 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
29698 do not need to think about this.
29701 \begin_layout Standard
29702 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
29704 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
29708 \begin_layout Standard
29709 References are described in detail in the section
29710 \begin_inset space ~
29720 \begin_inset space ~
29728 \begin_layout Section
29729 Table of Contents and other Listings
29730 \begin_inset Index idx
29733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29740 \begin_inset Index idx
29743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29744 Navigating ! Outline
29750 \begin_inset Index idx
29753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29760 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29769 \begin_layout Subsection
29771 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29773 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
29780 \begin_layout Standard
29781 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
29783 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29784 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
29786 \begin_inset space ~
29790 \begin_inset space ~
29796 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
29798 If you click on it, the
29802 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
29803 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
29804 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
29806 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
29808 \begin_inset space ~
29813 that is described in section
29814 \begin_inset space ~
29818 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29820 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
29827 \begin_layout Standard
29828 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
29829 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
29831 \begin_inset space ~
29835 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29837 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
29841 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
29843 \begin_inset space ~
29847 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29849 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
29853 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
29855 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
29858 \begin_layout Subsection
29859 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
29860 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29862 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
29869 \begin_layout Standard
29870 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
29872 You can insert them via the
29874 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29875 List/Contents/References
29878 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
29881 \begin_layout Section
29882 URLs and Hyperlinks
29883 \begin_inset Index idx
29886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29893 \begin_inset Index idx
29896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29905 \begin_layout Subsection
29907 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29916 \begin_layout Standard
29917 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
29919 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29925 \begin_layout Standard
29926 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
29928 \begin_inset Flex URL
29931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29933 https://www.lyx.org
29941 \begin_layout Standard
29942 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
29948 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
29952 \begin_layout Standard
29953 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29961 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
29970 \begin_layout Subsection
29972 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29974 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
29981 \begin_layout Standard
29982 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
29984 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29987 or with the toolbar button
29994 The appearing dialog has two fields:
30003 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
30004 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
30005 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30007 name "LyX's homepage"
30008 target "https://www.lyx.org"
30013 , an Email address like this:
30014 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30016 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
30017 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
30023 , or a link to a file.
30028 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30036 \begin_layout Standard
30037 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
30039 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30050 to the link target.
30053 \begin_layout Standard
30054 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
30055 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
30056 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
30057 the text style dialog.
30058 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
30062 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30064 name "LyX's homepage"
30065 target "https://www.lyx.org"
30073 \begin_layout Standard
30074 The link text color can be changed, when the option
30078 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
30080 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30081 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30085 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
30087 \begin_inset Newline newline
30095 \begin_inset Newline newline
30102 in the PDF Properties dialog.
30103 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303457
30107 \begin_layout Section
30109 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303474
30111 \begin_inset Index idx
30114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30121 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30123 name "sec:Counters"
30130 \begin_layout Standard
30132 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374084
30133 One powerful feature of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30134 is its ability to manage counters.
30135 Mostly, this is handled automatically, but there are times one wants to
30136 modify counters directly.
30137 This can be done in LyX using the counter inset, which is accessible from
30139 This allows one to set a counter's value; to reset it (to zero); to add
30140 to the value (or subtract from it, since the value added can be negative);
30141 to save it; to restore the saved value; and to print the value.
30142 These effects can also be limited to LyX itself.
30143 And they will appear in HTML and DocBook output, as well as in LaTeX.
30147 \begin_layout Standard
30149 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529162
30150 There are five commands you can use:
30153 \begin_layout Enumerate
30155 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529167
30156 Set counter: Allows you to assign a specific value to a counter
30159 \begin_layout Enumerate
30161 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529177
30162 Increase counter: Allows you to add some specified amount to a counter (or
30163 to subtract, if you choose a negative number)
30166 \begin_layout Enumerate
30168 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529180
30169 Reset to zero: Sets the value of the counter to 0.
30172 \begin_layout Enumerate
30174 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529184
30175 Save value of counter: Saves the value of the counter so that it can later
30179 \begin_layout Enumerate
30181 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529187
30182 Restore value of counter: Restores the previously saved value.
30185 \begin_layout Standard
30187 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374230
30188 The dialog allows you to choose which counter you wish to modify from all
30189 those that are available in the current document class.
30194 \begin_layout Section
30196 \begin_inset Index idx
30199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30206 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30208 name "sec:Appendices"
30215 \begin_layout Standard
30216 Appendices are created with the menu
30218 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30220 \begin_inset space ~
30224 \begin_inset space ~
30230 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
30231 as the appendix part of the book.
30232 This part is marked with a red borderline.
30235 \begin_layout Standard
30236 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
30237 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
30238 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
30239 and the subsection number.
30240 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
30244 \begin_layout Standard
30246 \begin_inset space ~
30250 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30252 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
30260 \begin_inset space ~
30264 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30266 reference "subsec:Export"
30273 \begin_layout Section
30275 \begin_inset Index idx
30278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30285 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30287 name "sec:Bibliography"
30294 \begin_layout Standard
30295 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
30297 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
30298 \begin_inset space ~
30302 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30304 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30311 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
30316 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
30317 \begin_inset space ~
30321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30323 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
30328 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
30329 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
30330 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
30334 using a bibliography database.
30337 \begin_layout Standard
30338 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
30339 use two bibliographies in this document, a
30343 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
30344 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
30345 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
30346 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
30347 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
30350 \begin_layout Subsection
30351 The Bibliography Environment
30352 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30354 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30361 \begin_layout Standard
30366 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
30368 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
30377 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
30379 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
30380 of ASCII characters only.
30384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30386 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30389 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
30395 \begin_inset Newline newline
30399 \begin_inset Flex URL
30402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30404 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
30414 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30424 , a short form of its title, as the key.
30425 \begin_inset Newline newline
30432 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
30433 the number of the entry.
30438 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30447 \begin_layout Standard
30448 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
30450 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30453 or the toolbar button
30456 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
30460 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
30461 containing the available citations.
30462 Select one or more keys from the list and
30472 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
30473 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
30477 \begin_layout Standard
30478 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
30479 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
30480 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
30482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30492 \begin_layout Standard
30496 Companion Second Edition
30499 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30501 key "latexcompanion"
30509 \begin_layout Standard
30510 The \SpecialChar LyX
30511 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
30512 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30522 \begin_layout Standard
30523 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30530 \begin_inset Index idx
30533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30542 \change_deleted -712698321 1555659455
30543 the label needs to be given the form
30544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30548 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30555 Author A and Author B(Year)
30556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30563 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
30570 \begin_inset space ~
30575 in the document settings
30576 \begin_inset Index idx
30579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30580 Document ! Settings
30587 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
30589 \begin_inset space ~
30595 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30597 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
30605 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
30607 Once you have done that, the
30611 dialog has three input fields instead of the
30628 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation
30629 reference, the second the year (without parentheses).
30630 These two are madatory.
30631 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full
30634 Baker, Jones, and Williams
30636 ) and in abrreviated form (
30643 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660544
30644 add the abbreviated form to
30648 and the full list to the optional
30656 \change_inserted -712698321 1555659886
30657 If specified like this,
30659 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles
30660 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660646
30663 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30670 is specified, toggling
30671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30678 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between
30679 full and abbreviated list
30683 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660793
30684 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for
30685 the citation references.
30686 In the bibliography entry, author and year must be added manually.
30691 \begin_layout Standard
30692 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
30695 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30697 \begin_inset space ~
30705 arg "layout-paragraph"
30709 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
30712 \begin_layout Subsection
30713 Bibliography databases
30714 \begin_inset Index idx
30717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30718 Bibliography ! Databases
30724 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30726 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30733 \begin_layout Standard
30734 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
30739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30740 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
30742 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
30743 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
30748 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
30750 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
30751 your working field in a database.
30752 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
30753 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
30754 list for that document.
30755 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
30759 \begin_layout Standard
30760 The database is a text file with the file extension
30761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30772 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
30773 The format is explained in
30774 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30781 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30783 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30785 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
30791 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
30792 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
30793 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
30795 \begin_inset Flex URL
30798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30800 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
30808 \begin_layout Standard
30810 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
30811 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30812 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
30814 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
30816 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
30817 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
30818 Those are addressed by
30823 \begin_inset Index idx
30826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30828 packages ! biblatex
30834 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30835 (although it has been significantly
30836 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30846 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30847 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30848 might conversely fail to correctly
30849 handle databases that use specific
30858 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
30862 \begin_layout Standard
30863 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30868 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
30870 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30874 \begin_inset Index idx
30877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30878 Document ! Settings
30890 \begin_inset space ~
30895 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30903 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30904 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30906 \begin_inset Index idx
30909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30910 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30919 \begin_layout Standard
30920 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30923 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30924 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
30926 \begin_inset space ~
30932 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
30933 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30941 Add bibliography to TOC
30943 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
30948 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
30949 in the document or just the cited references.
30951 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
30956 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s), should this
30957 differ from the encoding of the document.
30962 \begin_layout Standard
30963 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30964 style file is a text file with the file extension
30965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30976 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
30977 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30978 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
30979 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
30981 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
30986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30987 For information on how this is done, have a look at
30988 \begin_inset Newline newline
30992 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30994 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
31004 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31009 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
31013 \begin_layout Standard
31014 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
31017 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31019 \begin_inset Index idx
31022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31023 Bibliography ! Biblatex
31029 \begin_inset Index idx
31032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31034 packages ! biblatex
31042 \begin_layout Standard
31043 Accessing a database via
31047 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31050 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31051 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31053 \begin_inset space ~
31059 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31060 you cannot select a
31065 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
31069 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31072 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
31073 As for the styles, note the following.
31078 \begin_layout Standard
31083 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
31085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31096 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
31097 file (text file with the file extension
31098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31109 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
31110 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
31112 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
31116 \begin_layout Standard
31121 styles are not set in the
31124 \begin_inset space ~
31129 dialog, but in the document settings.
31130 \begin_inset Index idx
31133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31134 Document ! Settings
31139 However, in the dialog in the
31143 field, which is only visible if you use
31147 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
31148 example how its heading will appear).
31149 These options are described in detail in the
31154 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31164 \begin_layout Standard
31165 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
31166 \begin_inset space ~
31170 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31172 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31182 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31183 Bibliography Processors
31186 \begin_layout Standard
31187 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
31188 uses a bibliography processor,
31189 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
31190 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
31191 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31193 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
31194 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
31197 \begin_layout Standard
31198 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
31200 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
31201 You can do this on a general level in
31203 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31204 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31205 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31208 or for individual documents in
31210 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31211 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31215 The following variants are available by default:
31218 \begin_layout Description
31219 biber a specific, modern processor
31220 \begin_inset Index idx
31223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31230 developed exclusively for
31234 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31240 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
31245 makes use of; if you use the
31249 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
31256 \begin_layout Description
31257 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
31258 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
31259 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
31263 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
31266 \begin_layout Description
31267 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
31268 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
31272 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
31276 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
31280 features are supported.
31283 \begin_layout Standard
31284 By default (with the
31290 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31291 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31304 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31305 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31306 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31309 ), \SpecialChar LyX
31310 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
31323 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31324 -based bibliography styles).
31325 This should suit most needs.
31328 \begin_layout Standard
31329 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
31330 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
31331 (in \SpecialChar LyX
31336 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31337 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
31338 You can adjust it in
31340 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31341 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31342 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31348 \begin_layout Standard
31349 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
31350 can add below the selection.
31351 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
31352 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31358 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31368 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31372 \begin_layout Standard
31374 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
31376 These are explained in detail in section
31378 Customizing Bibliographies
31382 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31387 Additional Features
31392 \begin_layout Subsection
31394 \begin_inset Index idx
31397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31398 Bibliography ! Citation format
31404 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31406 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
31413 \begin_layout Standard
31414 Many different citation formats are common, e.
31415 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31419 \begin_inset space \space{}
31422 numerical citation (as
31423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31430 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
31431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31438 ) or author-year citations (as
31439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31448 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
31452 \begin_layout Standard
31453 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
31456 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31457 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31461 \begin_inset Index idx
31464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31465 Document ! Settings
31470 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
31476 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
31477 labels, is there to use
31480 \begin_inset space ~
31491 \begin_inset space ~
31496 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
31497 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31499 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31506 \begin_layout Standard
31507 With a bibliography database (see
31508 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31510 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31517 ) one has in contrary to the
31521 environment full access to the formatting styles.
31522 These style formats are available:
31525 \begin_layout Description
31527 \begin_inset space ~
31530 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31531 -based approached without any additional packages
31532 (simple numeric citations).
31535 \begin_layout Description
31536 Biblatex loads the package
31541 \begin_inset Index idx
31544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31546 packages ! biblatex
31551 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
31553 Biblatex citation style
31557 Biblatex bibliography style
31560 Options to the package
31564 can be entered in the
31571 \begin_layout Description
31573 \begin_inset space ~
31577 \begin_inset space ~
31580 mode) loads the package
31584 with the natbib compatibility mode.
31585 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
31597 behavior very closely.
31602 this option has some additional styles.
31607 styles are also supported by this variant.
31610 \begin_layout Description
31612 \begin_inset space ~
31615 (BibTeX) loads the package
31620 \begin_inset Index idx
31623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31630 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
31633 \begin_layout Description
31635 \begin_inset space ~
31638 (BibTeX) loads the package
31643 \begin_inset Index idx
31646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31653 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
31656 \begin_layout Standard
31665 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
31667 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
31676 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
31678 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
31679 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
31681 Biblatex citation style
31684 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
31690 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
31694 \begin_layout Standard
31695 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
31696 are available in the
31701 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
31702 a name prefix such as
31703 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31707 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31718 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
31719 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31723 \begin_inset space \space{}
31727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31738 \begin_layout Standard
31739 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
31741 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31745 \begin_inset space \space{}
31748 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
31750 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31754 \begin_inset space \space{}
31758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31770 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
31774 \begin_inset space ~
31782 \begin_inset space ~
31788 Here is a simple example where the text
31789 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31793 \begin_inset space ~
31797 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31800 appears after the reference:
31803 \begin_layout Quote
31805 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31808 key "latexcompanion"
31816 \begin_layout Standard
31817 All styles except for
31821 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
31823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31831 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
31835 \begin_layout Standard
31836 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
31837 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
31838 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
31843 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
31844 multi-citation (so-called
31845 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31848 qualified citation lists
31849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31855 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
31860 dialog will display three columns in the field
31867 \begin_inset space ~
31875 \begin_inset space ~
31883 \begin_inset space ~
31889 If you double-click on an item's
31892 \begin_inset space ~
31900 \begin_inset space ~
31905 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
31908 General text before
31914 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
31917 \begin_layout Section
31919 \begin_inset Index idx
31922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31929 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31938 \begin_layout Standard
31939 An index entry is created if you use the menu
31941 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31943 \begin_inset space ~
31948 or the toolbar button
31955 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
31956 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
31957 by \SpecialChar LyX
31958 as the index entry.
31961 \begin_layout Standard
31962 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
31964 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31965 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31967 \begin_inset space ~
31973 A light blue box labeled
31974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31982 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31985 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
31986 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
31990 \begin_layout Standard
31991 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
31992 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31993 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
31994 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31996 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31998 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
32006 \begin_layout Subsection
32007 Grouping Index Entries
32008 \begin_inset Index idx
32011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32020 \begin_layout Standard
32021 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
32023 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
32024 lists under the entry
32025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32033 First we create the entry
32034 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32038 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32042 \begin_inset space ~
32046 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32048 reference "subsec:Lists"
32053 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
32054 \begin_inset space ~
32058 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32060 reference "sec:Itemize"
32064 , we insert the command
32067 \begin_layout Standard
32073 \begin_layout Standard
32077 \begin_layout Standard
32083 \begin_layout Standard
32084 for the enumerated list in section
32085 \begin_inset space ~
32089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32091 reference "sec:Enumerate"
32098 \begin_layout Standard
32099 The exclamation mark
32100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32107 marks the grouping levels.
32108 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
32109 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
32110 If we don't have an index entry for
32111 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32118 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
32121 \begin_layout Subsection
32123 \begin_inset Index idx
32126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32127 Index ! Page ranges
32135 \begin_layout Standard
32136 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
32138 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
32139 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
32140 an index entry in section
32141 \begin_inset space ~
32145 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32147 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
32154 \begin_layout Standard
32157 Paragraph environments|(
32160 \begin_layout Standard
32161 and another entry at the end of section
32162 \begin_inset space ~
32166 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32168 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
32175 \begin_layout Standard
32178 Paragraph environments|)
32181 \begin_layout Standard
32183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32191 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32195 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32206 respectively start and end the index range.
32207 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
32208 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
32209 the pages of the indexed document parts.
32210 An example is the index entry
32211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32214 Document ! Settings
32215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32221 \begin_layout Subsection
32223 \begin_inset Index idx
32226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32227 Index ! Cross referencing
32235 \begin_layout Standard
32236 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
32237 We referred for example in the index entry
32238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32246 \begin_inset space ~
32250 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32252 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
32256 ) to the index entry
32257 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32261 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32264 in the same section using the entry
32267 \begin_layout Standard
32270 GIF|see{Image formats}
32273 \begin_layout Standard
32274 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
32276 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
32277 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
32280 \begin_layout Subsection
32282 \begin_inset Index idx
32285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32286 Index ! Entry order
32294 \begin_layout Standard
32295 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
32296 follow the rules for the index order.
32297 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
32302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32303 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
32305 \begin_inset space ~
32309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32311 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
32320 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
32321 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
32322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32346 \begin_inset Index idx
32349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32350 Dummy entries ! maïs
32356 \begin_inset Index idx
32359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32360 Dummy entries ! maître
32366 \begin_inset Index idx
32369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32370 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
32375 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
32376 maïs, maison, maître.
32377 To achieve this, we use the command
32380 \begin_layout Standard
32383 previous entry@current entry
32386 \begin_layout Standard
32387 In our case we want to have
32388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32403 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
32406 \begin_layout Standard
32412 \begin_layout Standard
32413 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
32414 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
32416 See the next subsection for an example.
32419 \begin_layout Subsection
32421 \begin_inset Index idx
32424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32425 Index ! Entry layout
32433 \begin_layout Standard
32434 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
32435 \begin_inset Index idx
32438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32441 This is an italic dummy entry
32446 You can also format the page number using the character
32447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32454 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32455 -command without a backslash.
32456 We can write for example
32459 \begin_layout Standard
32462 italic page number:|textit
32465 \begin_layout Standard
32466 to get the page number in italic.
32467 \begin_inset Index idx
32470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32471 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
32476 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
32477 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
32479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32495 \begin_inset space ~
32501 Have a look at section
32502 \begin_inset space ~
32506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32508 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32512 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32516 \begin_layout Standard
32517 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32525 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
32529 to generate the index, see section
32530 \begin_inset space ~
32534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32536 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
32545 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
32550 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
32551 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32554 key "latexcompanion"
32567 \begin_layout Standard
32568 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
32570 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
32571 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
32572 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
32573 If so, put the following in the preamble
32576 \begin_layout Standard
32588 \begin_layout Standard
32592 \begin_layout Standard
32598 \begin_layout Standard
32599 in the index entry.
32600 \begin_inset Index idx
32603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32604 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
32609 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
32610 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
32611 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
32614 \begin_layout Standard
32615 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
32616 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
32617 a bold font for all index entries.
32618 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
32630 documentation for details,
32631 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32633 key "makeindex,xindy"
32641 \begin_layout Subsection
32643 \begin_inset Index idx
32646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32653 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32655 name "subsec:Index-Program"
32662 \begin_layout Standard
32663 If the index generation program
32667 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
32668 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
32672 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
32673 distribution, is used.
32677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32682 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
32683 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
32684 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
32685 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
32686 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
32696 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
32698 dialog, see section
32699 \begin_inset space ~
32703 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32705 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
32710 The available options are listed and explained in
32711 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32713 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
32719 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
32723 \begin_layout Standard
32724 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
32725 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
32728 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32729 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32733 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
32734 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
32737 \begin_layout Subsection
32741 \begin_layout Standard
32742 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
32743 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
32744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32751 next to the standard index.
32753 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
32754 that add this feature.
32761 \begin_inset Index idx
32764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32766 packages ! splitidx
32771 package to generate multiple indexes.
32772 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
32777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32778 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
32780 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32788 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32789 style, but it also includes
32790 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
32791 Please consult the package's manual for details.
32799 \begin_layout Standard
32800 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
32801 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
32803 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32804 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32807 and select the option
32809 Use multiple Indexes
32816 already contains the standard index
32817 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32821 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32825 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
32826 also appear as a heading) to the
32830 input field and press the
32835 The new index now also appears in the list.
32836 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
32837 label color to the new index.
32840 \begin_layout Standard
32841 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
32844 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32845 List/Contents/References
32851 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
32852 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
32853 are additional features:
32856 \begin_layout Itemize
32857 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
32858 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
32861 \begin_layout Itemize
32862 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
32863 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
32868 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
32869 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
32870 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
32871 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
32874 \begin_layout Itemize
32879 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
32880 code in the name of the index.
32883 \begin_layout Section
32884 Nomenclature/Glossary
32885 \begin_inset Index idx
32888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32895 \begin_inset Index idx
32898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32927 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32929 name "sec:Nomenclature"
32936 \begin_layout Standard
32937 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
32938 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
32939 called nomenclature or glossary.
32942 \begin_layout Standard
32943 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32950 \begin_inset Index idx
32953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32961 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
32963 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32970 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
32974 \begin_layout Standard
32975 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
32976 and then use the menu
32978 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32984 \begin_inset space ~
32989 or the toolbar button
32992 arg "nomencl-insert"
32997 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33005 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33008 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
33011 \begin_layout Standard
33012 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
33013 The first is the term or
33017 that you wish to define.
33022 of the term or symbol.
33025 \begin_layout Standard
33026 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33034 To use \SpecialChar TeX
33035 code for nomenclature entries the option
33039 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
33047 \begin_layout Subsection
33048 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
33049 \begin_inset Index idx
33052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33053 Nomenclature ! Layout
33061 \begin_layout Standard
33062 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
33066 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
33069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33073 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33077 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33081 \begin_inset Newline newline
33089 \begin_inset Newline newline
33095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33102 character starts/ends the formula.
33103 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
33104 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
33106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33116 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
33126 \begin_layout Standard
33127 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33128 syntax is given in section
33129 \begin_inset space ~
33133 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33135 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33142 \begin_layout Standard
33146 \begin_inset space ~
33151 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
33153 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
33154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33158 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33165 in this document is:
33166 \begin_inset Newline newline
33171 dummy entry for the character
33176 \begin_inset Newline newline
33188 \begin_inset space ~
33198 font use the command
33227 \begin_layout Standard
33228 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
33229 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33233 \begin_inset space \space{}
33237 \begin_inset Newline newline
33253 \begin_inset Newline newline
33256 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
33257 This command will make the font of all symbols
33264 \begin_inset space ~
33272 \begin_layout Standard
33273 If the characters |
33274 \begin_inset space \space{}
33278 \begin_inset space \space{}
33282 \begin_inset space \space{}
33286 \begin_inset space \space{}
33290 \begin_inset space \space{}
33293 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
33294 code they need to be escaped
33295 by adding a quote character in front of them.
33296 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33297 LatexCommand nomenclature
33298 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
33299 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
33307 \begin_layout Subsection
33308 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
33309 \begin_inset Index idx
33312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33313 Nomenclature ! Sort order
33321 \begin_layout Standard
33322 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33323 -code of the symbol
33325 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
33327 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
33330 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33331 LatexCommand nomenclature
33333 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
33341 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33345 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33346 LatexCommand nomenclature
33349 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
33355 They will be sorted by
33356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33382 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33385 will be sorted before the
33389 since the character
33390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33397 is considered in sorting.
33400 \begin_layout Standard
33401 To control the sort order, you can edit the
33404 \begin_inset space ~
33409 field of the nomenclature dialog.
33410 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
33412 For the example given, you can insert
33416 in this field for the
33417 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33424 will be located before
33425 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33431 \begin_layout Standard
33432 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
33437 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33447 \begin_layout Subsection
33448 Nomenclature Options
33449 \begin_inset Index idx
33452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33453 Nomenclature ! Options
33459 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33461 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
33468 \begin_layout Standard
33473 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
33474 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
33477 \begin_layout Description
33478 refeq Appends the phrase
33479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33494 to every nomenclature entry, where
33500 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
33503 \begin_layout Description
33504 refpage Appends the phrase
33505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33520 to every nomenclature entry, where
33526 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
33529 \begin_layout Description
33530 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
33533 \begin_layout Standard
33534 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
33535 class options list in the
33537 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33541 In this document the options
33548 \begin_layout Standard
33549 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33555 \begin_layout Standard
33556 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
33557 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
33562 field in the nomenclature dialog:
33565 \begin_layout Description
33575 \begin_layout Description
33578 nomrefpage Like the
33585 \begin_layout Description
33588 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
33597 \begin_layout Description
33601 \begin_inset space ~
33607 \begin_inset space ~
33612 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
33615 \begin_layout Standard
33617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33624 are automatically translated for most document languages.
33625 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
33629 \begin_layout Standard
33638 \begin_inset Newline newline
33644 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33648 \begin_inset space ~
33660 unskip, see equation
33663 \begin_inset Newline newline
33670 pagedeclaration}[1]{
33671 \begin_inset Newline newline
33677 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33681 \begin_inset space ~
33698 \begin_layout Standard
33699 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
33702 \begin_inset space ~
33707 in the document settings under
33710 \begin_inset space ~
33718 \begin_layout Standard
33726 \begin_inset Newline newline
33730 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33734 \begin_inset space ~
33746 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
33748 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
33749 \begin_inset Newline newline
33756 pagedeclaration}[1]{
33757 \begin_inset Newline newline
33761 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33765 \begin_inset space ~
33777 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
33782 \begin_layout Subsection
33783 Printing the Nomenclature
33784 \begin_inset Index idx
33787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33788 Nomenclature ! Printing
33796 \begin_layout Standard
33797 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
33799 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33800 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
33805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33816 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
33817 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
33818 You can choose between these settings:
33821 \begin_layout Description
33822 Default a space of 1
33823 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33829 \begin_layout Description
33831 \begin_inset space ~
33835 \begin_inset space ~
33838 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
33841 \begin_layout Description
33842 Custom custom space
33845 \begin_layout Standard
33846 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
33847 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33851 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33855 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
33863 For example, in order to change the name to
33867 , add the following line to the preamble:
33870 \begin_layout Standard
33883 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
33886 \begin_layout Standard
33887 When you are using another document language than English, replace
33888 \begin_inset Newline newline
33903 , where *** is the name of the language used.
33906 \begin_layout Subsection
33907 Nomenclature Program
33908 \begin_inset Index idx
33911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33912 Nomenclature ! Program
33918 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33920 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
33927 \begin_layout Standard
33933 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
33934 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
33936 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
33941 by adding options, see section
33942 \begin_inset space ~
33946 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33948 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
33953 The available options are listed and explained in
33954 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33956 key "nomencl,makeindex"
33964 \begin_layout Section
33966 \begin_inset Index idx
33969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33976 \begin_inset Index idx
33979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33980 Document ! Branches
33986 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33988 name "sec:Branches"
33995 \begin_layout Standard
33996 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
33997 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
33998 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
33999 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
34002 \begin_layout Standard
34003 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
34004 allows you to put text into branches.
34005 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
34006 To create a branch, either select the menu
34008 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34009 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
34012 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
34014 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34021 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
34022 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
34023 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
34024 and whether the name of the branch should
34025 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
34026 (see below for an example).
34027 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
34028 to the name of the other) and to add
34029 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34037 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34041 \begin_inset space ~
34044 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
34045 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
34048 \begin_layout Standard
34049 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
34050 These boxes are inserted via the menu
34052 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34055 where you can choose a branch.
34056 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
34060 \begin_layout Standard
34061 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
34062 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
34065 \begin_layout Standard
34066 \begin_inset Branch Question
34070 \begin_layout Standard
34075 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
34083 \begin_layout Standard
34084 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34088 \begin_layout Standard
34093 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
34101 \begin_layout Standard
34108 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34109 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34112 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
34113 Consider for example a file
34114 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34121 which has the above branches.
34123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34130 is active, the PDF export file would be called
34131 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34135 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34154 branch were inactive,
34155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34163 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34167 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34170 branch was active, likewise
34171 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34175 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34186 branch was active, and
34187 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34190 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
34191 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34194 if both branches were active.
34195 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
34196 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34202 \begin_layout Standard
34203 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
34209 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
34210 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
34214 \begin_inset space ~
34222 \begin_layout Standard
34223 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34227 \begin_layout Standard
34233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34240 branch is deactivated.
34246 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34252 \begin_layout Standard
34253 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
34254 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
34255 definitions for each branch.
34256 For example you can define for the question branch
34260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34261 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34262 -syntax, see section
34263 \begin_inset space ~
34267 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34269 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34281 \begin_layout Standard
34291 \begin_layout Standard
34301 \begin_layout Standard
34302 and for the answer branch
34305 \begin_layout Standard
34315 \begin_layout Standard
34325 \begin_layout Standard
34326 \begin_inset Branch Question
34330 \begin_layout Standard
34334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34362 \begin_layout Standard
34363 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34367 \begin_layout Standard
34371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34399 \begin_layout Standard
34400 Now it is possible to use the
34404 question{\SpecialChar ldots
34411 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
34414 commands to obtain conditional output.
34415 Here is an example formula where only the
34422 \begin_inset Formula
34424 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
34432 \begin_layout Standard
34433 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
34441 \begin_layout Standard
34442 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
34444 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34448 \begin_inset space \space{}
34451 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
34453 For this advanced usage, see the
34459 Flex insets and InsetLayout
34464 \begin_layout Section
34466 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34468 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
34473 \begin_inset Index idx
34476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34485 \begin_layout Standard
34488 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34489 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34492 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
34494 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34500 \begin_inset Index idx
34503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34505 packages ! hyperref
34510 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
34511 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
34512 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
34513 part of the document.
34517 \begin_layout Standard
34518 The header information in the dialog tab
34522 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
34523 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
34524 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
34525 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
34529 \begin_inset space ~
34533 \begin_inset space ~
34538 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
34539 tries to extract the header information from your document title
34540 and author entries.
34544 \begin_inset space ~
34548 \begin_inset space ~
34552 \begin_inset space ~
34557 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
34560 \begin_layout Standard
34561 You can specify in the dialog tab
34565 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
34570 \begin_inset space ~
34574 \begin_inset space ~
34578 \begin_inset space ~
34583 option allows long links to be split;
34586 \begin_inset space ~
34590 \begin_inset space ~
34594 \begin_inset space ~
34602 \begin_inset space ~
34607 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
34610 \begin_inset space ~
34615 colors the different links.
34616 The default colors are:
34619 \begin_layout Labeling
34620 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34625 for hyperlinks and URLs
34628 \begin_layout Labeling
34629 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34637 \begin_layout Labeling
34638 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34646 \begin_layout Standard
34647 but you can change these in the field
34652 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
34655 \begin_layout Standard
34658 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
34661 \begin_layout Standard
34666 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
34667 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
34668 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
34671 \begin_layout Standard
34676 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
34677 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
34678 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
34688 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
34689 when opening the PDF.
34691 \begin_inset space ~
34694 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
34695 \begin_inset space ~
34698 1 will only display the sections.
34701 \begin_layout Standard
34702 PDF properties are also used in this document.
34703 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
34709 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
34710 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34720 \begin_layout Section
34722 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34724 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34726 name "sec:TeX-Code"
34733 \begin_layout Subsection
34736 \begin_inset Index idx
34739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34747 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34749 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
34756 \begin_layout Standard
34757 As \SpecialChar LyX
34758 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
34759 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
34760 commands and constructs,
34763 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
34764 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
34765 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
34766 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34767 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
34768 cannot support all packages and
34772 \begin_layout Standard
34773 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
34774 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
34775 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
34779 Code box is created by the menu
34781 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34783 \begin_inset space ~
34788 or by the toolbar button
34801 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
34809 \begin_layout Standard
34810 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
34812 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
34814 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
34818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34819 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
34824 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34831 , you can write the command part
34837 in a \SpecialChar TeX
34838 Code box before the word and the closing brace
34842 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
34843 Code box behind the word.
34844 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
34845 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
34849 \begin_layout Standard
34850 \begin_inset Graphics
34851 filename clipart/ERT.png
34859 \begin_layout Standard
34863 \begin_layout Standard
34864 This is a line with a
34868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34891 \begin_layout Standard
34892 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34900 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
34901 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
34902 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
34903 know that the command is finished.
34911 \begin_layout Subsection
34912 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34914 \begin_inset Argument 1
34917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34918 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
34925 \begin_inset Index idx
34928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34936 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34938 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34945 \begin_layout Standard
34946 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
34947 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34948 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
34949 uses in the background.
34950 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
34951 is based on commands, you can
34952 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34956 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34960 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
34961 any time if you know the right commands.
34962 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
34963 is the end of the day.
34964 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
34965 all caption labels bold.
34966 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
34968 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
34972 \begin_layout Standard
34973 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
34975 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34977 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34980 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34990 \begin_layout Standard
34991 As result you find that the package
34996 \begin_inset Index idx
34999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35007 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
35009 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35012 \SpecialChar menuseparator
35016 \begin_inset space ~
35024 \begin_layout Standard
35029 usepackage[options]{package name}
35032 \begin_layout Standard
35033 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
35034 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
35035 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
35036 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
35039 \begin_layout Standard
35040 In your case the package name is
35045 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
35050 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
35051 So you add the command
35054 \begin_layout Standard
35059 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
35062 \begin_layout Standard
35063 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
35067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35068 For more commands provided by the
35072 package, have a look at its documentation,
35073 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35088 \begin_layout Standard
35089 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
35091 For example if you use a
35095 class, you don't need the package
35099 , you can instead write
35102 \begin_layout Standard
35107 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
35112 \begin_layout Standard
35113 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
35114 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
35115 documentation of the document class you want to use.
35122 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
35125 \begin_layout Standard
35126 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
35127 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
35129 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
35130 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
35131 Code box as described in the previous
35135 \begin_layout Standard
35136 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
35137 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35140 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35142 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
35150 \begin_layout Standard
35151 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
35157 \begin_layout Standard
35161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35171 \begin_inset Note Note
35174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35175 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
35183 \begin_layout Left Header
35184 \begin_inset Argument 1
35187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35207 \begin_inset Note Note
35210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35211 defines the header line as described below
35219 \begin_layout Center Header
35220 \begin_inset Argument 1
35223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35232 \begin_layout Right Header
35233 \begin_inset Argument 1
35236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35257 \begin_layout Left Footer
35258 \begin_inset Argument 1
35261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35282 \begin_layout Center Footer
35283 \begin_inset Argument 1
35286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35298 \begin_inset Newline newline
35302 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
35308 \begin_layout Right Footer
35309 \begin_inset Argument 1
35312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35334 \begin_layout Section
35335 Customized Page Headers and Footers
35336 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35338 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
35343 \begin_inset Index idx
35346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35347 Document ! Header/Footer line
35353 \begin_inset Index idx
35356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35365 \begin_layout Standard
35366 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
35370 \begin_inset space ~
35381 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35387 \begin_inset space ~
35393 As a second step add in the menu
35395 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35396 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35405 Custom Header/Footerlines
35408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35412 This module offers the following 6
35413 \begin_inset space ~
35419 \begin_layout Description
35421 \begin_inset space ~
35425 \begin_inset space ~
35429 \begin_inset space ~
35433 \begin_inset space ~
35437 \begin_inset space ~
35443 \begin_layout Description
35445 \begin_inset space ~
35449 \begin_inset space ~
35453 \begin_inset space ~
35457 \begin_inset space ~
35461 \begin_inset space ~
35467 \begin_layout Standard
35468 for the different positions in the header/footer.
35469 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
35472 \begin_layout Standard
35473 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
35474 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
35476 \begin_inset space ~
35480 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35482 reference "fig:Page-layout"
35486 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
35489 \begin_layout Standard
35490 \begin_inset Float figure
35497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35500 \begin_inset Tabular
35501 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
35502 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
35503 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35504 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35505 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35507 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
35519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35525 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35536 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35554 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35565 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
35568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35569 The normal text on the page goes here.
35570 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
35572 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
35573 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
35578 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35587 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35598 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35616 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35627 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
35639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35645 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35663 \begin_inset Caption Standard
35665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35666 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35668 name "fig:Page-layout"
35672 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
35685 \begin_layout Standard
35686 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35694 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
35698 \begin_inset space ~
35703 is set to “Default”.
35704 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
35713 \begin_layout Subsection
35717 \begin_layout Standard
35718 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
35719 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
35720 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
35721 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
35723 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
35725 Defining the footer line works similarly.
35728 \begin_layout Standard
35729 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
35730 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
35734 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35736 \begin_inset space ~
35744 \begin_layout Description
35747 thepage prints the current page number
35750 \begin_layout Description
35753 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
35756 \begin_layout Description
35759 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
35762 \begin_layout Description
35765 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
35766 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
35769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35773 \begin_inset Quotes prd
35776 because it usually goes in a left header.
35779 \begin_layout Description
35782 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
35783 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
35785 It is normally used in the right header.
35788 \begin_layout Subsection
35789 Default header/footer
35792 \begin_layout Standard
35793 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
35794 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
35795 footer has the page number.
35796 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
35797 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
35798 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
35801 \begin_inset space ~
35809 \begin_layout Subsection
35813 \begin_layout Standard
35814 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
35815 Some pages are different.
35816 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
35817 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
35818 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
35819 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
35820 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
35823 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35824 Header and footer decoration line
35827 \begin_layout Standard
35828 By default, you get a 0.4
35829 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35832 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
35833 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
35845 in the following way:
35848 \begin_layout Standard
35855 headrulewidth}{thickness}
35858 \begin_layout Standard
35859 where thickness is a size in standard units like
35872 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
35873 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35879 \begin_layout Standard
35880 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
35882 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
35883 \begin_inset space ~
35887 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35897 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35898 Several header/footer lines
35901 \begin_layout Standard
35902 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
35903 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
35904 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
35906 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35921 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35922 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35924 \begin_inset space ~
35932 \begin_layout Standard
35939 headheight}{height}
35942 \begin_layout Standard
35947 is a size in standard units (e.
35948 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35952 \begin_inset space \space{}
35960 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
35961 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
35962 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35963 logfile with the menu
35965 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35967 \begin_inset space ~
35975 \begin_inset space ~
35980 to see if you can find a warning about the package
35985 \begin_inset Index idx
35988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35990 packages ! fancyhdr
35996 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
35997 for your header/footer.
36000 \begin_layout Subsection
36004 \begin_layout Standard
36005 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
36006 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
36007 This example consists of the following definition:
36010 \begin_layout Description
36012 \begin_inset space ~
36021 , empty optional argument
36024 \begin_layout Description
36026 \begin_inset space ~
36029 Header empty, empty optional argument
36032 \begin_layout Description
36034 \begin_inset space ~
36043 in the optional argument
36046 \begin_layout Description
36048 \begin_inset space ~
36057 in the optional argument
36060 \begin_layout Description
36062 \begin_inset space ~
36075 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36079 \begin_inset Newline newline
36083 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
36087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36090 in the optional argument
36093 \begin_layout Description
36095 \begin_inset space ~
36104 , empty optional argument
36107 \begin_layout Description
36110 headrulewidth set to 2
36111 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36117 \begin_layout Standard
36118 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
36119 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
36125 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36135 \begin_layout Standard
36136 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
36142 \begin_layout Standard
36146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36150 pagestyle{headings}
36156 \begin_inset Note Note
36159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36160 switches back to page style with the default headings
36168 \begin_layout Section
36169 Previewing Snippets of your Document
36170 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36172 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36177 \begin_inset Index idx
36180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36187 \begin_inset Index idx
36190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36199 \begin_layout Standard
36201 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
36202 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
36203 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
36206 \begin_layout Subsection
36210 \begin_layout Standard
36211 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36217 \begin_inset Index idx
36220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36222 packages ! preview-latex
36227 (on some systems named simply
36232 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36234 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36241 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36243 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
36251 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
36252 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36253 -package are automatically
36254 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
36258 \begin_layout Subsection
36262 \begin_layout Standard
36263 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
36264 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
36266 activate the option
36269 \begin_inset space ~
36276 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36282 \begin_inset space ~
36286 \begin_inset space ~
36289 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
36296 \begin_inset space ~
36309 \begin_inset space ~
36314 is the multiplication factor for the size.
36317 \begin_layout Standard
36318 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
36323 \begin_inset space ~
36331 \begin_inset space ~
36339 \begin_layout Standard
36340 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
36341 and when you finish
36345 \begin_layout Standard
36346 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36354 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
36355 generated by activating the option
36358 \begin_inset space ~
36364 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
36372 \begin_layout Subsection
36373 Selected document parts
36376 \begin_layout Standard
36377 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
36378 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
36379 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
36380 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36382 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
36384 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36388 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
36389 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
36390 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
36393 \begin_layout Standard
36394 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36401 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36413 is explained in section
36415 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
36420 \begin_inset space ~
36430 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
36431 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
36432 the final rotated boxes,
36433 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
36434 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
36436 Here is the result:
36439 \begin_layout Standard
36440 \begin_inset Preview
36442 \begin_layout Standard
36447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36451 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
36457 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
36467 height_special "totalheight"
36472 backgroundcolor "none"
36475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36500 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
36506 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
36513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36528 \begin_layout Standard
36529 Previewing works also for colors.
36530 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36549 is explained in section
36556 \begin_inset space ~
36569 \begin_layout Standard
36570 \begin_inset Preview
36572 \begin_layout Standard
36576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36595 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
36600 This is text within a colored, framed box.
36604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36619 \begin_layout Standard
36620 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
36626 \begin_layout Standard
36627 If \SpecialChar LyX
36628 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
36629 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
36630 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
36631 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36632 packages in your document preamble that are required by
36633 the \SpecialChar TeX
36635 If \SpecialChar LyX
36636 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
36637 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
36639 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
36640 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
36641 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
36644 \begin_layout Subsection
36649 \begin_layout Standard
36650 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36651 source of the whole document or parts of it.
36654 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
36656 \begin_inset space ~
36661 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36663 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
36665 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
36666 's main window, then only this selection
36667 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
36668 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
36669 the source view window.
36674 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
36675 ; but note that if you have
36676 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
36678 not just the one which is open at the time.
36681 \begin_layout Section
36682 Advanced Find and Replace
36683 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36685 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
36690 \begin_inset Index idx
36693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36700 \begin_inset Index idx
36703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36712 \begin_layout Subsection
36716 \begin_layout Standard
36717 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
36718 allows for searching of complex,
36719 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
36721 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
36722 The key-features are:
36725 \begin_layout Itemize
36726 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
36727 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
36728 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
36732 \begin_layout Itemize
36733 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
36734 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
36735 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
36736 a section heading will only be found within section headings
36739 \begin_layout Itemize
36740 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
36741 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
36742 outside of mathematics environments
36745 \begin_layout Itemize
36746 Search may be widened to a specific
36751 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36755 \begin_inset space ~
36758 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
36759 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
36766 \begin_layout Itemize
36767 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
36768 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
36769 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36773 \begin_inset space ~
36776 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
36779 \begin_layout Subsection
36783 \begin_layout Standard
36784 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
36786 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
36799 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
36802 ) or the toolbar button
36805 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
36811 Advanced Find and Replace
36816 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36820 \begin_layout Standard
36826 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
36830 \begin_inset space ~
36835 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
36838 arg "paragraph-break"
36842 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
36843 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
36847 arg "paragraph-break"
36850 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
36854 searches backwards.
36857 \begin_layout Standard
36861 \begin_inset space ~
36866 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
36875 \begin_inset space ~
36880 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
36883 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36884 Searching for mathematics
36887 \begin_layout Standard
36888 Mathematical formulas, such as
36889 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
36892 or something more complex like
36893 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
36896 , may be searched for by typing them in the
36901 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
36902 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
36903 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
36904 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
36910 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36914 \begin_layout Standard
36915 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
36916 This is done by switching to the
36920 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
36925 This way, entering in the
36932 \begin_layout Itemize
36933 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
36934 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
36937 \begin_layout Itemize
36938 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
36939 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
36942 \begin_layout Itemize
36943 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
36944 of it only within section headings.
36945 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
36946 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
36950 \begin_layout Itemize
36951 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
36952 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
36955 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36959 \begin_layout Standard
36960 The entries made in the
36964 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
36967 \begin_inset space ~
36973 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
36977 button or alternatively press
36980 arg "paragraph-break"
36987 while the cursor is in the
36990 \begin_inset space ~
36998 \begin_layout Standard
36999 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
37001 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
37005 \begin_layout Itemize
37006 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
37007 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
37008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37012 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37015 with its typewriter version
37016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37024 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37030 \begin_layout Itemize
37031 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
37033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37037 \begin_inset Formula $R$
37041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37049 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
37053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37056 (you may want to enable the
37059 \begin_inset space ~
37067 \begin_inset space ~
37072 options and disable the
37080 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
37081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37085 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37088 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
37089 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
37093 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
37096 , or occurrences of
37097 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
37101 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
37107 \begin_layout Subsection
37111 \begin_layout Standard
37112 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
37116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37117 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
37119 \begin_inset CommandInset href
37121 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
37131 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
37137 This is done with the context menu
37139 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37140 Insert Regular Expression
37142 while the cursor is in the
37147 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
37148 expression matching rules
37152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37153 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
37156 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37160 \begin_inset space ~
37163 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
37164 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
37170 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
37171 same text in the document.
37172 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
37173 Examples of using such a feature may be:
37176 \begin_layout Enumerate
37177 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
37182 editor the fraction
37183 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
37187 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37190 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
37191 fractions with the given denominator.
37194 \begin_layout Enumerate
37195 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
37207 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37212 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
37213 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
37214 Also, by inserting a
37215 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37218 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
37219 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
37222 \begin_layout Standard
37223 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
37224 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
37225 \begin_inset Formula $()$
37228 , and referring back to them through
37229 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
37233 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
37237 For example, try searching with the regexp
37238 \begin_inset Newline newline
37241 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
37244 \begin_inset Newline newline
37247 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
37250 \begin_layout Standard
37251 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
37254 \begin_layout Standard
37255 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37263 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
37264 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
37265 sub-expressions is absolute.
37267 \begin_inset space ~
37271 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
37274 always refers to the first occurrence of
37275 \begin_inset Formula $()$
37278 in all entered regexps.
37286 \begin_layout Section
37288 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37290 name "sec:Spellchecking"
37295 \begin_inset Index idx
37298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37307 \begin_layout Standard
37309 has a built-in spell checker.
37312 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37319 key or the toolbar button
37322 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
37325 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
37326 beginning of the currently selected text.
37327 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
37328 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
37329 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
37330 scrolled so that it is visible.
37331 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
37332 n, if any could be found.
37333 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
37337 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
37338 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
37341 \begin_layout Standard
37342 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
37345 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37349 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
37350 a different one at the top of the dialog.
37352 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
37353 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
37356 \begin_inset space ~
37364 arg "dialog-show character"
37367 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
37369 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
37372 \begin_layout Standard
37373 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
37374 can be downloaded from here:
37375 \begin_inset Newline newline
37379 \begin_inset Flex URL
37382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37384 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
37390 \begin_inset Newline newline
37394 \begin_inset space ~
37397 files for each language.
37398 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
37399 \begin_inset space ~
37402 files into \SpecialChar LyX
37403 's installation subfolder
37411 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37413 \begin_inset Newline newline
37416 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
37417 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
37418 but in most cases these are
37434 is the language code.
37437 \begin_layout Subsection
37441 \begin_layout Standard
37444 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37445 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37447 \begin_inset space ~
37450 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37453 you can set the following things:
37456 \begin_layout Description
37458 \begin_inset space ~
37461 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
37462 should use for spell checking.
37463 Depending on your platform,
37473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37474 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
37475 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
37490 \begin_inset space ~
37493 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
37496 \begin_layout Description
37498 \begin_inset space ~
37501 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
37502 will always use the given language
37503 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
37506 \begin_layout Description
37508 \begin_inset space ~
37511 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
37513 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37517 \begin_inset space \space{}
37521 This should normally not be needed.
37524 \begin_layout Description
37526 \begin_inset space ~
37530 \begin_inset space ~
37533 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
37535 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37539 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37545 \begin_layout Description
37547 \begin_inset space ~
37550 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
37551 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
37552 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
37553 appear in a context menu.
37554 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
37558 \begin_layout Description
37560 \begin_inset space ~
37564 \begin_inset space ~
37568 \begin_inset space ~
37571 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
37575 \begin_layout Section
37577 \begin_inset Index idx
37580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37587 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37589 name "sec:Thesaurus"
37596 \begin_layout Standard
37598 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
37599 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
37608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37609 \begin_inset CommandInset href
37611 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
37621 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
37623 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
37624 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
37625 which are available for many languages.
37628 \begin_layout Standard
37629 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
37630 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
37634 \begin_layout Subsection
37635 Setting up the thesaurus
37638 \begin_layout Standard
37647 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
37651 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
37656 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
37658 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37662 \begin_inset space ~
37670 For instance, the US English files are named:
37673 \begin_layout Itemize
37677 \begin_layout Itemize
37681 \begin_layout Standard
37690 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
37691 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
37694 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37695 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37696 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37698 \begin_inset space ~
37703 ) to the path where they are installed.
37707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37708 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
37709 ies, typical locations are
37715 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
37719 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
37723 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
37726 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
37732 LibreOffice-<Version>
37739 On the Mac, the default location is
37741 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
37742 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
37743 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
37744 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
37745 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37746 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
37754 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
37755 during the \SpecialChar LyX
37756 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
37760 \begin_layout Standard
37761 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
37762 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
37764 \begin_inset Newline newline
37768 \begin_inset Flex URL
37771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37773 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
37781 \begin_layout Standard
37782 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
37783 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
37785 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37786 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37787 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37789 \begin_inset space ~
37794 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37796 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
37797 and point \SpecialChar LyX
37801 \begin_layout Standard
37802 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
37804 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37807 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
37813 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
37816 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
37817 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
37819 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37825 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37826 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37827 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37829 \begin_inset space ~
37834 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
37837 \begin_layout Subsection
37838 Using the thesaurus
37841 \begin_layout Standard
37842 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
37844 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37847 or the toolbar button
37850 arg "thesaurus-entry"
37853 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
37855 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
37857 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
37858 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
37859 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
37868 ), related terms (such as
37871 \begin_inset space ~
37880 ), compounds (such as
37883 \begin_inset space ~
37892 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
37901 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
37904 \begin_layout Standard
37905 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
37906 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
37910 \begin_layout Standard
37911 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
37912 the dictionary, such as the above
37916 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
37917 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37921 \begin_inset space \space{}
37924 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
37925 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
37926 For example, looking up the word form
37930 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
37935 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
37936 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37940 \begin_inset space \space{}
37951 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
37952 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
37953 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
37956 \begin_layout Section
37958 \begin_inset Index idx
37961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37968 \begin_inset Index idx
37971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37972 Document ! Change Tracking
37978 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37980 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
37987 \begin_layout Standard
37988 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
37989 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
37990 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
37991 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
37993 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37995 \begin_inset space ~
37998 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38000 \begin_inset space ~
38008 \begin_layout Standard
38009 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
38023 The color depends on the author that made the change.
38024 You can change the color in
38026 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38027 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38029 \begin_inset space ~
38033 \begin_inset space ~
38038 \SpecialChar menuseparator
38044 \begin_inset Index idx
38047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38048 Color ! Change tracking
38053 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
38054 's status bar when the
38055 cursor is in changed text.
38056 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
38059 arg "changes-merge"
38065 \begin_layout Standard
38066 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
38068 \begin_inset Index idx
38071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38080 \begin_layout Standard
38081 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38087 \begin_layout Standard
38088 \begin_inset Graphics
38089 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
38097 \begin_layout Standard
38098 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38104 \begin_layout Standard
38105 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
38108 \begin_layout Standard
38109 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38115 \begin_layout Standard
38116 \begin_inset Tabular
38117 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
38118 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38119 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38120 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38121 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38130 arg "changes-track"
38138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38144 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38146 \begin_inset space ~
38149 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38151 \begin_inset space ~
38160 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38169 arg "changes-output"
38177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38183 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38185 \begin_inset space ~
38188 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38190 \begin_inset space ~
38194 \begin_inset space ~
38198 \begin_inset space ~
38207 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38228 Jumps to the next change
38234 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38243 arg "change-accept"
38251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38257 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38259 \begin_inset space ~
38262 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38264 \begin_inset space ~
38273 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38282 arg "change-reject"
38290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38296 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38298 \begin_inset space ~
38301 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38303 \begin_inset space ~
38312 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38321 arg "changes-merge"
38329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38335 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38337 \begin_inset space ~
38340 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38342 \begin_inset space ~
38351 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38360 arg "all-changes-accept"
38368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38374 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38376 \begin_inset space ~
38379 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38381 \begin_inset space ~
38385 \begin_inset space ~
38394 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38403 arg "all-changes-reject"
38411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38417 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38419 \begin_inset space ~
38422 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38424 \begin_inset space ~
38428 \begin_inset space ~
38437 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38460 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38461 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
38463 \begin_inset space ~
38472 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38495 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38497 \begin_inset space ~
38513 \begin_layout Standard
38514 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38520 \begin_layout Standard
38521 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
38541 \begin_layout Standard
38542 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
38543 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
38544 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
38545 the next change after the current cursor position.
38546 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
38547 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
38548 step to the next change.
38549 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
38552 \begin_layout Standard
38553 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
38554 to describe a change.
38557 \begin_layout Standard
38559 \change_deleted -712698321 1577206802
38560 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38566 \begin_inset Index idx
38569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38577 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
38579 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38586 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38592 \begin_layout Section
38593 Comparison of Documents
38594 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38596 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
38601 \begin_inset Index idx
38604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38605 Comparison of documents
38613 \begin_layout Standard
38614 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
38617 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38621 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
38622 file with change tracking enabled showing the
38624 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
38626 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
38630 \begin_inset space ~
38634 \begin_inset space ~
38638 \begin_inset space ~
38647 \begin_inset space ~
38651 \begin_inset space ~
38655 \begin_inset space ~
38659 \begin_inset space ~
38663 \begin_inset space ~
38667 \begin_inset space ~
38672 enables the change tracking option
38675 \begin_inset space ~
38679 \begin_inset space ~
38683 \begin_inset space ~
38688 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
38691 \begin_layout Section
38692 International Support
38693 \begin_inset Index idx
38696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38697 International support
38705 \begin_layout Standard
38706 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
38707 with any language you want.
38708 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
38709 up \SpecialChar LyX
38711 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38713 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
38721 \begin_layout Standard
38722 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
38723 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
38724 \begin_inset space ~
38728 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38730 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
38737 \begin_layout Subsection
38739 \begin_inset Index idx
38742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38749 \begin_inset Index idx
38752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38753 Document ! Settings
38759 \begin_inset Index idx
38762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38763 Document ! Language
38771 \begin_layout Standard
38774 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38775 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38778 dialog lets you set
38780 the language, the quote style and character encoding
38785 \begin_layout Standard
38790 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38795 \begin_inset space ~
38800 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
38801 For details about the different encoding options see section
38802 \begin_inset space ~
38806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38808 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
38815 \begin_layout Subsection
38816 Keyboard mapping configuration
38817 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38819 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
38826 \begin_layout Standard
38827 If you have for example a U.
38828 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38831 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
38832 can use an alternate keymap.
38833 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
38838 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38839 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38840 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
38843 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
38844 \begin_inset space ~
38848 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38850 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
38855 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
38856 which one you want to use.
38859 \begin_layout Standard
38860 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
38861 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
38862 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
38863 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38866 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
38867 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
38868 one to support the characters you want.
38869 This and many other customizations are explained in the
38876 \begin_layout Chapter
38879 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38881 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
38888 \begin_layout Standard
38889 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
38890 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
38891 topic inside the user's guide.
38894 \begin_layout Section
38896 \begin_inset Index idx
38899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38908 \begin_layout Standard
38913 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
38916 \begin_layout Subsection
38920 \begin_layout Standard
38921 Creates a new document.
38924 \begin_layout Subsection
38928 \begin_layout Standard
38929 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
38930 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
38931 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
38933 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
38934 Furthermore, templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring
38940 \begin_layout Subsection
38944 \begin_layout Standard
38948 \begin_layout Subsection
38952 \begin_layout Standard
38953 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
38954 Click there on a file to open it.
38957 \begin_layout Subsection
38959 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
38963 \begin_layout Standard
38965 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
38966 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
38970 \begin_layout Subsection
38974 \begin_layout Standard
38975 Closes the current document.
38978 \begin_layout Subsection
38982 \begin_layout Standard
38983 Closes all opened documents.
38986 \begin_layout Subsection
38990 \begin_layout Standard
38991 Saves the actual document.
38994 \begin_layout Subsection
38998 \begin_layout Standard
38999 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
39000 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
39004 \begin_layout Subsection
39006 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
39010 \begin_layout Standard
39012 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
39013 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use
39019 \begin_layout Subsection
39023 \begin_layout Standard
39024 Saves all opened documents.
39027 \begin_layout Subsection
39031 \begin_layout Standard
39032 Reloads the actual document from disk.
39035 \begin_layout Subsection
39039 \begin_layout Standard
39040 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
39041 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
39042 It is described in the section
39044 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
39049 Additional Features
39054 \begin_layout Subsection
39058 \begin_layout Standard
39059 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
39060 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
39062 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
39063 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
39067 \begin_layout Standard
39068 When using the menu entry
39071 \begin_inset space ~
39076 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
39080 \begin_inset space ~
39084 \begin_inset space ~
39088 \begin_inset space ~
39093 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
39094 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
39097 \begin_layout Subsection
39099 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39101 name "subsec:Export"
39108 \begin_layout Standard
39109 You can export your document to various file formats.
39110 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
39112 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
39113 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
39114 during its configuration.
39117 \begin_layout Standard
39118 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
39120 \begin_inset space ~
39124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39126 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
39133 \begin_layout Description
39139 \begin_inset space ~
39142 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
39144 \begin_inset space ~
39147 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
39148 \begin_inset Newline newline
39151 Since \SpecialChar LyX
39152 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
39156 \begin_layout Description
39157 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
39163 \begin_layout Description
39165 \begin_inset space ~
39168 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
39174 \begin_layout Description
39175 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
39176 's native DVI-format.
39177 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
39178 files paths or file names in your document.
39180 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
39187 \begin_layout Description
39188 DVI DVI-format that also allows the usage of special characters or spaces
39189 in files paths or file names
39192 \begin_layout Description
39194 \begin_inset space ~
39201 ) DVI-format using the program
39203 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39206 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
39210 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39218 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
39226 \begin_layout Description
39228 \begin_inset space ~
39231 (cropped) the same as
39235 but with cropped page margins.
39238 \begin_layout Description
39240 \begin_inset space ~
39243 Dot text file with code in the programming language
39247 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
39252 \begin_layout Description
39256 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39264 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
39272 \begin_layout Description
39274 \begin_inset space ~
39278 \begin_inset space ~
39281 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
39285 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
39293 \begin_layout Description
39297 \begin_inset space ~
39306 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39307 source that is compilable with the program
39309 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39313 \begin_layout Description
39317 \begin_inset space ~
39322 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39323 source, additionally all images used in the document
39324 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
39328 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
39331 \begin_layout Description
39335 \begin_inset space ~
39340 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39341 source code, additionally all images used in the document
39342 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
39350 \begin_layout Description
39354 \begin_inset space ~
39363 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39364 source that is compilable with the program
39370 \begin_layout Description
39372 \begin_inset space ~
39376 \begin_inset space ~
39383 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39384 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
39390 \begin_layout Description
39392 \begin_inset space ~
39395 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
39396 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
39398 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39402 \begin_inset space \space{}
39407 \begin_inset space ~
39411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39426 represent the version number)
39429 \begin_layout Description
39431 \begin_inset space ~
39435 \begin_inset space ~
39438 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
39439 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
39440 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39444 \begin_layout Description
39445 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
39446 's internal XHTML engine
39449 \begin_layout Description
39451 \begin_inset space ~
39455 \begin_inset space ~
39459 \begin_inset space ~
39463 \begin_inset space ~
39466 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
39471 For the conversion the program
39480 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39483 \begin_layout Description
39484 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
39489 \begin_layout Description
39491 \begin_inset space ~
39494 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
39496 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
39499 For the conversion the program
39508 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39511 \begin_layout Description
39513 \begin_inset space ~
39516 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
39517 For the conversion the program
39526 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39529 \begin_layout Description
39531 \begin_inset space ~
39534 (cropped) the same as
39537 \begin_inset space ~
39542 but with cropped page margins
39545 \begin_layout Description
39549 \begin_inset space ~
39554 PDF-format using the program
39558 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
39561 \begin_layout Description
39565 \begin_inset space ~
39569 \begin_inset space ~
39577 \begin_inset space ~
39582 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
39583 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39587 \begin_inset space \space{}
39590 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
39594 \begin_layout Description
39598 \begin_inset space ~
39603 PDF-format using the program
39605 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39608 , produces PDF-files directly
39611 \begin_layout Description
39615 \begin_inset space ~
39620 PDF-format using the program
39624 , produces PDF-files directly
39627 \begin_layout Description
39631 \begin_inset space ~
39636 PDF-format using the program
39640 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
39643 \begin_layout Description
39647 \begin_inset space ~
39652 PDF-format using the program
39657 , produces PDF-files directly
39660 \begin_layout Description
39664 \begin_inset space ~
39672 \begin_layout Description
39676 \begin_inset space ~
39680 \begin_inset space ~
39685 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
39686 and then exported as text using the program
39691 \begin_layout Description
39696 PostScript format using the program
39704 options see section
39705 \begin_inset space ~
39709 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39711 reference "subsec:General-output"
39718 \begin_layout Description
39719 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39720 source and also code in the statistical programming
39734 it is possible to use
39738 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
39742 \begin_layout Standard
39743 If one of the menu entries
39750 \begin_inset space ~
39759 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39761 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
39763 \begin_inset space ~
39767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39769 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
39774 \begin_inset Index idx
39777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39778 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
39787 \begin_layout Subsection
39791 \begin_layout Standard
39792 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
39793 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
39796 \begin_inset space ~
39800 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39802 reference "sec:Paths"
39807 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
39816 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
39817 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
39818 's preferences as described in section
39819 \begin_inset space ~
39823 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39825 reference "subsec:Converters"
39832 \begin_layout Subsection
39833 New and Close Window
39836 \begin_layout Standard
39837 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
39841 \begin_layout Subsection
39845 \begin_layout Standard
39846 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
39849 \begin_layout Section
39851 \begin_inset Index idx
39854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39863 \begin_layout Subsection
39867 \begin_layout Standard
39868 Described in section
39869 \begin_inset space ~
39873 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39875 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
39882 \begin_layout Subsection
39883 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
39886 \begin_layout Standard
39887 Described in section
39888 \begin_inset space ~
39892 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39894 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39901 \begin_layout Subsection
39905 \begin_layout Standard
39906 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
39907 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
39910 \begin_layout Subsection
39914 \begin_layout Standard
39915 Selects the whole document.
39918 \begin_layout Subsection
39919 Find & Replace (Quick)
39922 \begin_layout Standard
39923 Described in section
39924 \begin_inset space ~
39928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39930 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39937 \begin_layout Subsection
39938 Find & Replace (Advanced)
39941 \begin_layout Standard
39942 Described in section
39943 \begin_inset space ~
39947 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39949 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
39956 \begin_layout Subsection
39957 Move Paragraph Up/Down
39960 \begin_layout Standard
39961 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
39965 \begin_layout Subsection
39967 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
39971 \begin_layout Standard
39973 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
39974 Described in section
39975 \begin_inset space ~
39979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39981 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
39990 \begin_layout Subsection
39992 \begin_inset Index idx
39995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39996 Paragraph ! Settings
40004 \begin_layout Standard
40005 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
40006 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
40010 \begin_layout Standard
40011 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
40012 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
40018 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40019 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40021 \begin_inset space ~
40027 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
40031 \begin_layout Subsection
40033 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
40037 \begin_layout Standard
40039 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
40040 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
40045 \begin_layout Enumerate
40047 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
40048 Customize text properties by means of the
40054 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
40057 ; this is described in section
40058 \begin_inset space ~
40062 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40064 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
40071 \begin_layout Enumerate
40073 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
40074 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
40076 Apply last settings
40079 \begin_layout Enumerate
40081 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
40082 Change the casing of selected text (
40097 \begin_layout Subsection
40099 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
40103 \begin_layout Standard
40105 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
40106 This sub-menu only appears the document class or a module provides custom
40107 text styles (in the case of this document:
40129 \begin_inset space ~
40133 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40135 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
40144 \begin_layout Subsection
40145 Table and Rows & Columns
40148 \begin_layout Standard
40149 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
40150 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
40151 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
40154 \begin_layout Subsection
40158 \begin_layout Standard
40159 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
40160 It will dissolve this inset.
40161 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
40165 \begin_layout Subsection
40169 \begin_layout Standard
40170 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
40171 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
40174 \begin_layout Subsection
40175 Increase/Decrease List Depth
40178 \begin_layout Standard
40179 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
40181 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
40182 \begin_inset space ~
40186 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40188 reference "sec:Nesting"
40193 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40195 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
40202 \begin_layout Section
40204 \begin_inset Index idx
40207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40216 \begin_layout Standard
40217 At the bottom of the
40221 menu the opened documents are listed.
40224 \begin_layout Subsection
40225 Open/Close all Insets
40228 \begin_layout Standard
40229 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
40232 \begin_layout Subsection
40233 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
40236 \begin_layout Standard
40237 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
40240 \begin_layout Standard
40241 Math macros are described in the
40248 \begin_layout Subsection
40252 \begin_layout Standard
40253 Shows the outline window as described in sections
40254 \begin_inset space ~
40258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40260 reference "sec:Navigating"
40265 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40267 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
40274 \begin_layout Subsection
40278 \begin_layout Standard
40279 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
40281 \begin_inset space ~
40285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40287 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
40294 \begin_layout Subsection
40298 \begin_layout Standard
40299 Opens a window showing console messages.
40300 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
40302 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40305 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
40306 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
40307 is processing the document.
40310 \begin_layout Subsection
40312 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40314 name "subsec:Toolbars"
40319 \begin_inset Index idx
40322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40331 \begin_layout Standard
40332 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
40334 All toolbars and the
40337 \begin_inset space ~
40342 can be turned on and off.
40347 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
40359 \begin_inset space ~
40371 \begin_inset space ~
40376 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
40380 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
40387 \begin_layout Standard
40392 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
40396 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
40397 or when a certain feature is enabled.
40398 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
40399 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
40400 is inside a formula or table respectively.
40403 \begin_layout Standard
40405 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
40406 \begin_inset space ~
40410 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40412 reference "sec:Toolbars"
40419 \begin_layout Subsection
40423 \begin_layout Standard
40427 \begin_inset space ~
40431 \begin_inset space ~
40435 \begin_inset space ~
40439 \begin_inset space ~
40443 \begin_inset space ~
40447 \begin_inset space ~
40452 will split \SpecialChar LyX
40453 's main window vertically while
40456 \begin_inset space ~
40460 \begin_inset space ~
40464 \begin_inset space ~
40468 \begin_inset space ~
40472 \begin_inset space ~
40476 \begin_inset space ~
40481 will split it horizontally.
40482 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
40483 to view the same document, but at different positions.
40484 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
40485 three or more documents at the same time.
40486 To close a split view, use the menu
40489 \begin_inset space ~
40493 \begin_inset space ~
40501 \begin_layout Subsection
40505 \begin_layout Standard
40506 Closes a split view.
40509 \begin_layout Subsection
40513 \begin_layout Standard
40514 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
40515 so that you will see nothing but your text.
40516 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
40517 's main window fullscreen.
40518 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
40519 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
40522 \begin_layout Section
40524 \begin_inset Index idx
40527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40536 \begin_layout Subsection
40540 \begin_layout Standard
40541 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
40542 \begin_inset space ~
40546 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40548 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
40559 \begin_layout Subsection
40561 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40563 name "subsec:Special-Character"
40570 \begin_layout Standard
40571 Here you can insert the following characters:
40574 \begin_layout Description
40579 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
40582 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
40583 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40584 -packages you have installed.
40585 You can get a complete display by checking
40588 \begin_inset space ~
40594 \begin_inset Newline newline
40598 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40606 Not all characters will be visible in the
40610 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
40611 dialog (see section
40612 \begin_inset space ~
40616 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40618 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
40622 ) can display every character.
40630 \begin_layout Description
40631 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
40635 \begin_layout Description
40637 \begin_inset space ~
40641 \begin_inset space ~
40644 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
40645 \begin_inset space ~
40649 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40651 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
40658 \begin_layout Description
40660 \begin_inset space ~
40663 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
40666 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40667 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40673 \begin_layout Description
40675 \begin_inset space ~
40678 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
40681 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40682 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40688 \begin_layout Description
40690 \begin_inset space ~
40693 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
40697 \begin_layout Description
40699 \begin_inset space ~
40702 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
40706 \begin_layout Description
40708 \begin_inset space ~
40712 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482504
40713 Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when pressing
40719 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40724 Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
40726 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40730 \begin_inset space \space{}
40733 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
40734 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
40740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40743 To insert a fraction use the command
40748 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40752 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
40758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40761 The visible space is hereby the character before the
40768 \begin_layout Description
40770 \begin_inset space ~
40773 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
40777 \begin_layout Description
40779 \begin_inset space ~
40783 \begin_inset Index idx
40786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40793 \begin_inset Index idx
40796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40797 Language ! Phonetic symbols
40802 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
40803 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
40805 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40811 \begin_inset Index idx
40814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40822 \begin_inset Newline newline
40825 More information about this feature can be found in the
40831 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
40837 \begin_layout Description
40838 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
40840 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
40841 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
40845 \begin_layout Subsection
40849 \begin_layout Standard
40850 Opens a submenu with the following options:
40853 \begin_layout Description
40854 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
40855 \begin_inset script superscript
40857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40866 \begin_layout Description
40867 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
40868 \begin_inset script subscript
40870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40879 \begin_layout Description
40881 \begin_inset space ~
40884 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
40885 \begin_inset space ~
40889 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40891 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
40898 \begin_layout Description
40900 \begin_inset space ~
40903 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
40904 \begin_inset space ~
40908 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40910 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
40917 \begin_layout Description
40919 \begin_inset space ~
40922 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
40923 \begin_inset space ~
40927 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40929 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
40936 \begin_layout Description
40938 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482457
40940 \begin_inset space ~
40943 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
40945 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40949 \begin_inset space \space{}
40952 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
40953 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
40959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40962 To insert a fraction use the command
40967 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40971 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
40977 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40980 The visible space is hereby the character before the
40989 \begin_layout Description
40991 \begin_inset space ~
40994 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
40995 \begin_inset space ~
40999 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41001 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
41008 \begin_layout Description
41010 \begin_inset space ~
41013 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
41014 \begin_inset space ~
41018 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41020 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
41027 \begin_layout Description
41029 \begin_inset space ~
41032 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
41033 \begin_inset space ~
41037 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41039 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
41046 \begin_layout Description
41047 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
41048 \begin_inset space ~
41052 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41054 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
41061 \begin_layout Description
41063 \begin_inset space ~
41066 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
41067 \begin_inset space ~
41071 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41073 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
41080 \begin_layout Description
41082 \begin_inset space ~
41085 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
41086 \begin_inset space ~
41090 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41092 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
41099 \begin_layout Description
41101 \begin_inset space ~
41105 \begin_inset space ~
41108 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
41111 \begin_inset space ~
41115 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41117 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
41124 for a usage example.
41127 \begin_layout Description
41129 \begin_inset space ~
41133 \begin_inset space ~
41136 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
41137 \begin_inset space ~
41141 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41143 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
41150 \begin_layout Description
41152 \begin_inset space ~
41155 Break Inserts a forced line break that
41156 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482910
41159 justifies the remaining text as described in section
41160 \begin_inset space ~
41164 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41166 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
41173 \begin_layout Description
41175 \begin_inset space ~
41178 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
41179 \begin_inset space ~
41183 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41185 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
41192 \begin_layout Description
41194 \begin_inset space ~
41197 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
41198 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
41200 \begin_inset space ~
41204 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41206 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
41213 \begin_layout Description
41215 \begin_inset space ~
41218 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
41219 \begin_inset space ~
41223 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41225 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
41232 \begin_layout Description
41234 \begin_inset space ~
41238 \begin_inset space ~
41241 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
41242 \begin_inset space ~
41246 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41248 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
41255 \begin_layout Subsection
41257 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459357
41261 \begin_layout Standard
41263 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459959
41264 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
41265 The submenu allows you to insert
41268 \begin_layout Description
41270 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460018
41272 \begin_inset space ~
41275 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
41278 \begin_layout Description
41280 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460347
41282 \begin_inset space ~
41286 \begin_inset space ~
41289 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last
41293 \begin_layout Description
41295 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647074
41297 \begin_inset space ~
41300 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
41303 \begin_layout Description
41305 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647089
41307 \begin_inset space ~
41310 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
41313 \begin_layout Description
41315 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647093
41317 \begin_inset space ~
41321 \begin_inset space ~
41324 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last
41328 \begin_layout Description
41330 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647133
41332 \begin_inset space ~
41335 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
41338 \begin_layout Description
41340 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647170
41342 \begin_inset space ~
41346 \begin_inset space ~
41350 \begin_inset space ~
41353 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
41356 \begin_layout Description
41358 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647240
41360 \begin_inset space ~
41363 Name inserts the user name as specified in
41365 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41366 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41372 \begin_layout Description
41374 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647259
41376 \begin_inset space ~
41379 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
41381 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41382 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41388 \begin_layout Description
41390 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460561
41391 Other\SpecialChar ldots
41392 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three
41393 date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
41396 \begin_layout Subsection
41399 List/Contents/References
41402 \begin_layout Standard
41403 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
41407 \begin_inset space ~
41428 are described in section
41429 \begin_inset space ~
41433 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41435 reference "sec:toc"
41444 is described in section
41445 \begin_inset space ~
41449 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41451 reference "sec:Index"
41459 is described in section
41460 \begin_inset space ~
41464 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41466 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
41472 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
41475 is described in section
41476 \begin_inset space ~
41480 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41482 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
41489 \begin_layout Subsection
41493 \begin_layout Standard
41494 To insert floats, as described in section
41495 \begin_inset space ~
41499 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41501 reference "sec:Floats"
41505 and in detail the chapter
41512 \begin_inset space ~
41520 \begin_layout Subsection
41524 \begin_layout Standard
41525 To insert notes, described in section
41526 \begin_inset space ~
41530 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41532 reference "sec:Notes"
41539 \begin_layout Subsection
41543 \begin_layout Standard
41544 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
41546 Branches are described in section
41547 \begin_inset space ~
41551 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41553 reference "sec:Branches"
41560 \begin_layout Subsection
41564 \begin_layout Standard
41565 Inserts document class-specific insets.
41566 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
41568 An example is the document class
41569 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
41571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41579 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
41583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41588 with three custom insets.
41591 Flex insets and InsetLayout
41595 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
41601 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
41604 \begin_layout Subsection
41606 \begin_inset Index idx
41609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41618 \begin_layout Standard
41619 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
41621 For more information see chapter
41623 External Document Parts
41626 \begin_inset space ~
41632 \begin_layout Subsection
41634 \begin_inset Index idx
41637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41646 \begin_layout Standard
41647 Inserts a box in a certain style.
41648 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
41655 \begin_inset space ~
41663 \begin_layout Subsection
41667 \begin_layout Standard
41672 dialog as described in section
41673 \begin_inset space ~
41677 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41679 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41686 \begin_layout Subsection
41690 \begin_layout Standard
41695 as described in section
41696 \begin_inset space ~
41700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41702 reference "sec:Cross-References"
41709 \begin_layout Subsection
41713 \begin_layout Standard
41718 as described in section
41719 \begin_inset space ~
41723 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41725 reference "sec:Cross-References"
41732 \begin_layout Subsection
41734 \begin_inset Index idx
41737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41744 \begin_inset Index idx
41747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41748 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
41756 \begin_layout Standard
41757 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
41758 Floats are described in section
41759 \begin_inset space ~
41763 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41765 reference "sec:Floats"
41769 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
41772 \change_inserted -712698321 1590482693
41780 \begin_inset space ~
41788 \begin_layout Subsection
41792 \begin_layout Standard
41793 Inserts an index entry as described in section
41794 \begin_inset space ~
41798 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41800 reference "sec:Index"
41807 \begin_layout Subsection
41811 \begin_layout Standard
41812 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
41813 \begin_inset space ~
41817 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41819 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
41826 \begin_layout Subsection
41830 \begin_layout Standard
41831 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
41832 Tables are described in section
41833 \begin_inset space ~
41837 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41839 reference "sec:Tables"
41843 and in detail in the chapter
41850 \begin_inset space ~
41858 \begin_layout Subsection
41862 \begin_layout Standard
41868 Graphics are described in section
41869 \begin_inset space ~
41873 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41875 reference "sec:Graphics"
41882 \begin_layout Subsection
41886 \begin_layout Standard
41887 Inserts a URL as described in section
41888 \begin_inset space ~
41892 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41894 reference "subsec:URLs"
41901 \begin_layout Subsection
41905 \begin_layout Standard
41906 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
41907 \begin_inset space ~
41911 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41913 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
41920 \begin_layout Subsection
41924 \begin_layout Standard
41925 Inserts a footnote as described in section
41926 \begin_inset space ~
41930 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41932 reference "sec:Footnotes"
41939 \begin_layout Subsection
41943 \begin_layout Standard
41944 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
41945 \begin_inset space ~
41949 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41951 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
41958 \begin_layout Subsection
41961 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
41964 \begin_layout Standard
41965 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
41966 environments of the same type.
41968 \begin_inset space ~
41972 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41974 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
41978 for an explanation.
41981 \begin_layout Subsection
41985 \begin_layout Standard
41986 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
41987 title or caption of a float.
41988 Inserts a short title as described in section
41989 \begin_inset space ~
41993 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41995 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
42002 \begin_layout Subsection
42007 \begin_layout Standard
42008 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
42009 Code box as described in section
42010 \begin_inset space ~
42014 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42016 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
42023 \begin_layout Subsection
42025 \begin_inset Index idx
42028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42037 \begin_layout Standard
42038 Inserts a program listings box.
42039 Program listings are explained in the chapter
42041 Program Code Listings
42046 \begin_inset space ~
42054 \begin_layout Subsection
42056 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
42060 \begin_layout Standard
42062 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
42063 Inserts the actual date.
42064 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
42071 \begin_layout Subsection
42075 \begin_layout Standard
42076 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
42077 \begin_inset space ~
42081 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42083 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
42090 \begin_layout Section
42092 \begin_inset Index idx
42095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42104 \begin_layout Standard
42105 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
42106 \begin_inset space ~
42109 of the current document.
42110 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
42113 \begin_layout Subsection
42117 \begin_layout Standard
42118 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
42119 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
42120 to jump, for example, between section
42121 \begin_inset space ~
42125 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
42126 \begin_inset space ~
42129 2.5 and use the submenu
42132 \begin_inset space ~
42136 \begin_inset space ~
42143 \begin_inset space ~
42149 \begin_inset space ~
42153 \begin_inset space ~
42159 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
42163 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
42169 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
42172 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
42175 \begin_layout Standard
42176 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
42180 \begin_inset space ~
42185 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
42188 \begin_inset space ~
42193 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
42196 \begin_layout Subsection
42197 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
42200 \begin_layout Standard
42201 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
42205 \begin_layout Subsection
42209 \begin_layout Standard
42210 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
42211 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
42212 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
42216 \begin_inset space ~
42220 \begin_inset space ~
42228 \begin_layout Subsection
42232 \begin_layout Standard
42233 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
42236 The \SpecialChar LyX
42237 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
42239 \begin_inset space ~
42247 \begin_inset space ~
42252 manual for a detailed description.
42255 \begin_layout Section
42257 \begin_inset Index idx
42260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42269 \begin_layout Subsection
42273 \begin_layout Standard
42274 Change Tracking is described in section
42275 \begin_inset space ~
42279 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42281 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42288 \begin_layout Subsection
42296 \begin_layout Standard
42297 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
42298 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
42299 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42301 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
42302 to the clipboard or update the view.
42303 \begin_inset Newline newline
42306 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42310 \begin_layout Standard
42313 Open Containing Directory
42315 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
42316 's temporary folder for the document.
42317 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
42318 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
42319 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
42320 For example some journals require to send the
42324 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
42328 \begin_layout Subsection
42329 Start Appendix Here
42332 \begin_layout Standard
42333 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
42334 as described in section
42335 \begin_inset space ~
42339 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42341 reference "sec:Appendices"
42348 \begin_layout Subsection
42350 \begin_inset space ~
42356 \begin_layout Standard
42357 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
42358 default output format for the document (menu
42360 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42361 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42362 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42364 \begin_inset space ~
42368 \begin_inset space ~
42374 \begin_inset space ~
42378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42380 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42384 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
42387 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42388 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42390 \begin_inset space ~
42393 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42395 \begin_inset space ~
42398 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42400 \begin_inset space ~
42404 \begin_inset space ~
42410 \begin_inset space ~
42414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42416 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42420 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
42421 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
42423 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42424 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42426 \begin_inset space ~
42429 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42431 \begin_inset space ~
42434 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42438 \begin_inset space ~
42442 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42444 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42449 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
42450 when it is first configured.
42451 The default output format is
42454 \begin_inset space ~
42462 \begin_layout Subsection
42463 View (Other Formats)
42466 \begin_layout Standard
42467 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
42468 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
42469 actual document with an external program.
42470 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
42471 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42472 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
42474 All possible formats are listed in section
42475 \begin_inset space ~
42479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42481 reference "subsec:Export"
42486 You should at least see the menu entry
42491 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42493 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
42495 \begin_inset space ~
42499 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42501 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
42506 \begin_inset Index idx
42509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42510 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42519 \begin_layout Standard
42520 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
42521 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
42523 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42524 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42526 \begin_inset space ~
42529 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42531 \begin_inset space ~
42534 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42538 \begin_inset space ~
42542 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42544 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42549 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
42550 when it is first configured.
42553 \begin_layout Subsection
42555 \begin_inset space ~
42561 \begin_layout Standard
42562 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
42563 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
42566 \begin_layout Subsection
42567 Update (Other Formats)
42570 \begin_layout Standard
42571 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
42572 your document without opening a new viewer window.
42575 \begin_layout Subsection
42576 View Master Document
42579 \begin_layout Standard
42580 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
42582 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42596 \begin_inset space ~
42601 manual for more information on this topic).
42602 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
42603 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
42607 \begin_inset space ~
42611 \begin_inset space ~
42616 generates the output of the whole book, while
42620 will just output the chapter alone.
42623 \begin_layout Standard
42624 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
42625 in the document settings (menu
42627 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42628 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42629 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42631 \begin_inset space ~
42635 \begin_inset space ~
42641 \begin_inset space ~
42645 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42647 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42651 ) or in the preferences (menu
42653 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42654 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42656 \begin_inset space ~
42659 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42661 \begin_inset space ~
42664 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42666 \begin_inset space ~
42670 \begin_inset space ~
42676 \begin_inset space ~
42680 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42682 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42689 \begin_layout Subsection
42690 Update Master Document
42693 \begin_layout Standard
42694 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
42696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42710 \begin_inset space ~
42715 manual for more information on this topic).
42716 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
42717 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
42720 \begin_layout Standard
42721 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
42722 in the document settings (menu
42724 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42725 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42726 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42728 \begin_inset space ~
42732 \begin_inset space ~
42738 \begin_inset space ~
42742 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42744 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42748 ) or in the preferences (menu
42750 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42751 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42753 \begin_inset space ~
42756 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42758 \begin_inset space ~
42761 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42763 \begin_inset space ~
42767 \begin_inset space ~
42773 \begin_inset space ~
42777 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42779 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42786 \begin_layout Subsection
42788 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42790 name "subsec:Compressed"
42797 \begin_layout Standard
42798 Un/compresses the current document.
42799 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
42800 compression (see the
42802 Additional Features
42804 manual for details).
42807 \begin_layout Subsection
42811 \begin_layout Standard
42812 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
42815 \begin_layout Subsection
42819 \begin_layout Standard
42820 The document settings are described in appendix
42821 \begin_inset space ~
42825 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42827 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
42834 \begin_layout Section
42836 \begin_inset Index idx
42839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42848 \begin_layout Subsection
42852 \begin_layout Standard
42853 Spell checking is explained in section
42854 \begin_inset space ~
42858 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42860 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
42867 \begin_layout Subsection
42871 \begin_layout Standard
42872 The thesaurus is described in section
42873 \begin_inset space ~
42877 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42879 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
42886 \begin_layout Subsection
42888 \begin_inset Index idx
42891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42898 \begin_inset Index idx
42901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42910 \begin_layout Standard
42911 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
42912 the highlighted document part.
42915 \begin_layout Subsection
42921 \begin_inset Index idx
42924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42925 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
42934 \begin_layout Standard
42935 Generates with the help of the program
42937 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
42940 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
42941 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
42942 This feature is not available on Windows.
42945 \begin_layout Subsection
42951 \begin_inset Index idx
42954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42964 \begin_layout Standard
42965 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42970 \begin_inset space ~
42975 to see the full filename paths.
42978 \begin_layout Subsection
42980 \begin_inset Index idx
42983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42992 \begin_layout Standard
42993 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
42994 files as described in section
42995 \begin_inset space ~
42999 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43001 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
43008 \begin_layout Subsection
43010 \begin_inset Index idx
43013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43026 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
43031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43044 \begin_inset Index idx
43047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43048 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
43057 \begin_layout Standard
43058 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
43059 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
43060 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43061 -packages and programs it needs; see
43063 \begin_inset space ~
43067 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43069 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
43076 \begin_layout Subsection
43080 \begin_layout Standard
43085 dialog as described in detail in appendix
43086 \begin_inset space ~
43090 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43092 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
43099 \begin_layout Section
43101 \begin_inset Index idx
43104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43113 \begin_layout Standard
43114 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
43115 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
43117 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
43121 \begin_layout Standard
43125 \begin_inset space ~
43130 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
43131 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43132 packages and classes found
43133 by \SpecialChar LyX
43135 \begin_inset space ~
43139 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43141 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
43148 \begin_layout Standard
43152 \begin_inset space ~
43157 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
43162 \begin_layout Section
43164 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43166 name "sec:Toolbars"
43173 \begin_layout Standard
43174 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
43175 \begin_inset space ~
43179 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43181 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
43188 \begin_layout Standard
43189 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
43190 This is described in the
43192 Additional Features
43197 \begin_layout Subsection
43199 \begin_inset Index idx
43202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43211 \begin_layout Standard
43212 \begin_inset Graphics
43213 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
43221 \begin_layout Standard
43222 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43228 \begin_layout Standard
43229 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
43234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43246 \begin_inset Note Note
43249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43250 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
43255 manual for more information.
43263 \begin_layout Standard
43264 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43270 \begin_layout Standard
43271 \begin_inset Tabular
43272 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
43273 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43274 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
43275 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
43277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43281 \begin_inset Graphics
43282 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
43292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43296 pull-down box for the environments
43309 \begin_layout Standard
43310 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
43316 \begin_layout Standard
43318 \begin_inset Tabular
43319 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
43320 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43321 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43322 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43323 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43346 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43353 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43376 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43383 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43406 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43413 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43422 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
43430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43436 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43443 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43452 arg "spelling-continuously"
43460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43464 Spellcheck continuously
43470 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43493 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43500 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43523 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43530 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43553 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43560 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43583 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43590 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43613 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43615 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
43620 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43629 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43638 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
43646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43652 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43654 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43658 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43662 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43671 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43678 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
43686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43692 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43694 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43698 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43702 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43711 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43720 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
43728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43734 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43735 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
43742 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43763 Emphasize text, function of the
43764 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
43767 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43769 \begin_inset space ~
43772 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43774 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
43780 arg "dialog-show character"
43791 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43812 Set text to noun style, function of the
43813 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
43816 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43818 \begin_inset space ~
43821 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43823 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
43829 arg "dialog-show character"
43840 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43846 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
43849 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
43857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43862 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
43865 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43872 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43878 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
43883 arg "textstyle-apply"
43893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43898 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
43899 Format text using the current settings in the
43901 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43903 \begin_inset space ~
43906 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43917 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43940 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43941 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
43943 \begin_inset space ~
43952 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43961 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
43969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43975 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43982 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43989 arg "tabular-insert"
43997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44003 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44010 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44016 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
44019 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
44027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44032 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
44035 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44042 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44051 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
44059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44063 Toggle outline window on/off,
44065 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
44072 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44081 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
44089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44093 Toggle math toolbar on/off
44099 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44108 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
44116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44120 Toggle table toolbar on/off
44133 \begin_layout Subsection
44135 \begin_inset Index idx
44138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44147 \begin_layout Standard
44148 \begin_inset Graphics
44149 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
44157 \begin_layout Standard
44158 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44164 \begin_layout Standard
44165 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
44169 \begin_layout Standard
44170 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44176 \begin_layout Standard
44177 \begin_inset Tabular
44178 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
44179 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44180 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44181 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44182 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44209 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44218 arg "layout-toggle Enumerate"
44226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44236 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44245 arg "layout-toggle Itemize"
44253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44263 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44272 arg "layout-toggle List"
44280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44290 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44299 arg "layout-toggle Description"
44307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44317 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44326 arg "depth-increment"
44334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44340 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44342 \begin_inset space ~
44346 \begin_inset space ~
44355 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44364 arg "depth-decrement"
44372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44378 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44380 \begin_inset space ~
44384 \begin_inset space ~
44393 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44402 arg "float-insert figure"
44410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44416 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44417 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
44424 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44433 arg "float-insert table"
44441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44447 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44448 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
44455 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44478 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44485 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44494 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
44502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44508 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44515 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44524 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
44532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44538 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44545 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44568 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44570 \begin_inset space ~
44579 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44588 arg "nomencl-insert"
44596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44602 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44604 \begin_inset space ~
44613 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44622 arg "footnote-insert"
44630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44636 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44643 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44652 arg "marginalnote-insert"
44660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44666 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44668 \begin_inset space ~
44677 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44700 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44701 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
44703 \begin_inset space ~
44712 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44721 arg "box-insert Frameless"
44729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44735 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44742 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44765 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44772 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44795 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44797 \begin_inset space ~
44806 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44815 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
44823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44829 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44830 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
44837 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44846 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
44854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44860 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44861 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44863 \begin_inset space ~
44872 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44881 arg "dialog-show character"
44889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44895 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44897 \begin_inset space ~
44900 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44907 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44913 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
44918 arg "textstyle-apply"
44926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44931 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
44932 Format text using the recent settings in the
44935 arg "dialog-show character"
44944 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44953 arg "layout-paragraph"
44961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44967 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44969 \begin_inset space ~
44978 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44987 arg "thesaurus-entry"
44995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45001 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45015 \begin_layout Subsection
45016 View/Update Toolbar
45017 \begin_inset Index idx
45020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45021 Toolbar ! View / Update
45029 \begin_layout Standard
45030 \begin_inset Graphics
45031 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
45038 \begin_layout Standard
45039 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45045 \begin_layout Standard
45046 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
45050 \begin_layout Standard
45051 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45057 \begin_layout Standard
45058 \begin_inset Tabular
45059 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
45060 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
45061 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45062 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45063 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45086 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45093 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45102 arg "buffer-update"
45110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45116 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45123 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45132 arg "master-buffer-view"
45140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45146 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45148 \begin_inset space ~
45157 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45166 arg "master-buffer-update"
45174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45180 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45182 \begin_inset space ~
45186 \begin_inset space ~
45195 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45204 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
45212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45218 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45219 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45220 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
45221 Synchronize with Output
45227 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45238 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
45248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45254 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45255 View (Other Formats)
45261 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45268 arg "update-others"
45272 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
45280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45286 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45287 Update (Other Formats)
45300 \begin_layout Standard
45302 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
45303 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
45309 \begin_layout Subsection
45313 \begin_layout Standard
45314 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
45315 \begin_inset space ~
45319 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45321 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
45325 , the table toolbar
45326 \begin_inset Index idx
45329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45338 \begin_inset space ~
45343 manual and the math macro toolbar
45344 \begin_inset Index idx
45347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45360 \begin_layout Chapter
45361 The Document Settings
45362 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45364 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
45369 \begin_inset Index idx
45372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45373 Document ! Settings
45381 \begin_layout Standard
45385 \begin_inset space ~
45390 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
45391 is called with the menu
45393 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45397 You can save your document settings as default with the
45399 Save as Document Defaults
45401 button in any dialog.
45402 This will create a template named
45406 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
45407 when you create a new document without
45411 \begin_layout Standard
45416 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
45417 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
45420 \begin_layout Standard
45421 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
45422 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
45423 to find the one you are looking for.
45424 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
45425 the submenus of the dialog.
45427 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45431 \begin_inset space \space{}
45435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45442 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
45443 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
45444 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
45447 \begin_layout Section
45451 \begin_layout Standard
45452 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
45454 Document classes are described in section
45455 \begin_inset space ~
45459 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45461 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
45469 \begin_layout Standard
45473 \begin_inset space ~
45478 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
45483 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
45484 as a layout for a document class.
45485 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
45487 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
45496 \begin_layout Standard
45497 Some classes use special class options by default.
45498 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
45502 and you can decide to use them or not.
45503 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
45504 recommended you leave them untouched.
45509 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45510 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
45515 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45517 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
45522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45523 When you want to use one of the following drivers
45524 \begin_inset Newline newline
45529 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
45532 \begin_inset Newline newline
45535 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45536 distribution, see section
45541 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45543 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
45556 \begin_layout Standard
45561 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
45562 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
45563 in the background if the child document
45564 is opened without its master.
45565 This way child documents are always compilable.
45566 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
45573 \begin_inset space ~
45581 \begin_layout Standard
45582 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45593 \begin_inset Index idx
45596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45598 packages ! prettyref
45604 \begin_inset Index idx
45607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45609 packages ! refstyle
45614 for cross-references, see section
45615 \begin_inset space ~
45619 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45621 reference "sec:Cross-References"
45628 \begin_layout Section
45632 \begin_layout Standard
45633 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
45634 Please refer to the section
45637 \begin_inset space ~
45645 \begin_inset space ~
45650 manual for details.
45653 \begin_layout Section
45657 \begin_layout Standard
45658 Modules are explained in section
45659 \begin_inset space ~
45663 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45665 reference "subsec:Modules"
45672 \begin_layout Section
45676 \begin_layout Standard
45678 \begin_inset space ~
45682 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45684 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
45691 \begin_layout Section
45695 \begin_layout Standard
45696 The document font settings are described in section
45697 \begin_inset space ~
45701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45703 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
45710 \begin_layout Section
45714 \begin_layout Standard
45715 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
45727 \begin_inset space ~
45732 and whether it should be a
45735 \begin_inset space ~
45740 can also be specified here.
45743 \begin_layout Standard
45744 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
45745 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
45746 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
45748 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
45751 \begin_layout Standard
45754 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
45757 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
45758 justifies the text on screen.
45759 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
45761 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288869
45765 \begin_layout Standard
45767 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288904
45776 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
45781 \begin_layout Section
45785 \begin_layout Standard
45786 This dialog is described in sections
45787 \begin_inset space ~
45791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45793 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
45798 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45800 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
45807 \begin_layout Section
45811 \begin_layout Standard
45812 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
45813 \begin_inset space ~
45817 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45819 reference "subsec:Margins"
45826 \begin_layout Section
45828 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45830 name "sec:Language-encodings"
45835 \begin_inset Index idx
45838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45839 Language ! Encoding
45847 \begin_layout Standard
45848 The document language and quote styles are set here.
45849 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
45850 (the \SpecialChar LyX
45852 is always encoded in utf8).
45853 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
45854 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
45855 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
45856 -command is not known for
45857 a particular character).
45858 \change_inserted -712698321 1557594829
45862 \begin_layout Standard
45864 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596095
45865 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
45866 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
45867 files in Unicode – or utf8, for that matter (which
45868 is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
45869 's default encoding).
45870 This should normally fit your needs, since \SpecialChar LaTeX
45871 's Unicode support covers the
45872 characters of most scripts.
45873 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive, so there might be cases where
45874 using one of the traditional, or
45875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45882 , encodings is necessary.
45885 \begin_layout Standard
45887 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596136
45889 provides support for these traditional encodings.
45892 Traditional (auto-selected)
45898 dropdown, \SpecialChar LyX
45899 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for
45900 the given language(s).
45902 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
45906 \begin_layout Standard
45908 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
45909 If you use the option
45914 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
45917 If the document contains text in more than one language you
45918 \change_inserted -712698321 1557595342
45921 may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45924 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595350
45925 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
45926 exactly one encoding.
45927 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
45932 \begin_layout Standard
45934 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596155
45935 As a third option, \SpecialChar LyX
45941 If this is chosen, any character outside the 7bit ASCII range will be output
45942 as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
45946 \begin_layout Standard
45948 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645585
45949 Finally, you can also select
45953 , which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
45954 Note that this encoding is then used for
45959 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings
45960 and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation
45964 \begin_layout Standard
45966 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
45969 Do not load inputenc
45971 checkbox does what it states: It prevents \SpecialChar LyX
45972 from automatically loading the
45979 \begin_inset Index idx
45982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45984 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
45986 packages ! inputenc
45992 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads
45993 inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
45994 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
45995 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
45996 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
45998 Note that this option is only available for the standard
46004 Traditional (auto-selected)
46011 \begin_layout Standard
46013 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596063
46015 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
46016 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
46017 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
46018 installation supports Unicode), choose
46019 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
46020 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
46021 is quite incomplete, so
46022 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
46027 (when \SpecialChar LyX
46028 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
46029 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
46030 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
46031 -commands is not used, because all
46032 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
46033 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46034 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46035 , two new alternative engines
46036 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
46038 Both engines support Unicode natively.
46040 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
46043 \begin_inset space ~
46051 \begin_inset space ~
46059 \begin_inset space ~
46065 \begin_inset space ~
46069 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46071 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
46076 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
46080 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
46085 \begin_layout Standard
46089 \begin_inset space ~
46094 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46095 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
46097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46105 The possible settings are:
46108 \begin_layout Description
46109 Default uses the language package that is selected in
46111 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46112 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46116 \begin_inset space ~
46120 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46122 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
46129 \begin_layout Description
46130 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
46131 format you will use.
46132 In many cases this will be
46137 \begin_inset Index idx
46140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46148 If the newer package
46153 \begin_inset Index idx
46156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46158 packages ! polyglossia
46163 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46164 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46165 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
46167 this package will be used instead of
46174 \begin_layout Description
46176 \begin_inset space ~
46187 would be more appropriate.
46190 \begin_layout Description
46191 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
46192 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
46196 (for German texts), type in
46199 \begin_inset Newline newline
46204 usepackage{ngerman}
46207 \begin_layout Description
46208 None will not use a language package.
46209 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
46212 \begin_layout Standard
46213 Here is a list with the important encodings:
46216 \begin_layout Description
46218 \change_deleted -712698321 1557645284
46220 \begin_inset space ~
46224 \begin_inset space ~
46228 \begin_inset space ~
46235 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46241 \begin_inset Index idx
46244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46246 packages ! inputenc
46252 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
46253 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
46254 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
46260 \begin_layout Description
46261 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
46263 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
46264 commands, which may result in a big
46265 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
46266 -commands are needed.
46268 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596221
46269 This is the same as the
46282 \begin_layout Description
46284 \begin_inset space ~
46288 \begin_inset space ~
46291 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
46294 \begin_layout Description
46296 \begin_inset space ~
46300 \begin_inset space ~
46303 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
46306 \begin_layout Description
46308 \begin_inset space ~
46311 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
46314 \begin_layout Description
46316 \begin_inset space ~
46320 \begin_inset space ~
46323 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
46324 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
46327 \begin_layout Description
46329 \begin_inset space ~
46333 \begin_inset space ~
46336 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
46340 \begin_layout Description
46342 \begin_inset space ~
46346 \begin_inset space ~
46349 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
46350 ISO-8859-13 encoding
46353 \begin_layout Description
46355 \begin_inset space ~
46359 \begin_inset space ~
46363 \begin_inset space ~
46366 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
46367 \begin_inset space ~
46373 \begin_layout Description
46375 \begin_inset space ~
46379 \begin_inset space ~
46383 \begin_inset space ~
46386 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
46387 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
46390 \begin_layout Description
46392 \begin_inset space ~
46396 \begin_inset space ~
46399 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
46400 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
46401 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46402 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
46403 \begin_inset space ~
46407 \begin_inset space ~
46413 \begin_layout Description
46415 \begin_inset space ~
46419 \begin_inset space ~
46422 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
46423 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
46424 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46426 should try to use the encoding Unicode
46427 \begin_inset space ~
46431 \begin_inset space ~
46437 \begin_layout Description
46439 \begin_inset space ~
46443 \begin_inset space ~
46446 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
46449 \begin_layout Description
46451 \begin_inset space ~
46455 \begin_inset space ~
46458 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
46461 \begin_layout Description
46463 \begin_inset space ~
46467 \begin_inset space ~
46470 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
46473 \begin_layout Description
46475 \begin_inset space ~
46478 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
46481 \begin_layout Description
46483 \begin_inset space ~
46486 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
46489 \begin_layout Description
46491 \begin_inset space ~
46495 \begin_inset space ~
46498 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
46501 \begin_layout Description
46503 \begin_inset space ~
46507 \begin_inset space ~
46513 \begin_layout Description
46515 \begin_inset space ~
46519 \begin_inset space ~
46522 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
46525 \begin_layout Description
46527 \begin_inset space ~
46531 \begin_inset space ~
46537 \begin_layout Description
46539 \begin_inset space ~
46543 \begin_inset space ~
46546 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46552 \begin_inset Index idx
46555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46562 , when using this, set the document language to
46567 \begin_layout Description
46569 \begin_inset space ~
46573 \begin_inset space ~
46576 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46581 , when using this, set the document language to
46584 \begin_inset space ~
46590 \begin_layout Description
46592 \begin_inset space ~
46596 \begin_inset space ~
46599 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46605 \begin_inset Index idx
46608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46610 packages ! japanese
46615 , when using this, set the document language to
46620 \begin_layout Description
46622 \begin_inset space ~
46626 \begin_inset space ~
46629 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46634 , when using this, set the document language to
46639 \begin_layout Description
46641 \begin_inset space ~
46645 \begin_inset space ~
46648 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46653 , when using this, set the document language to
46658 \begin_layout Description
46660 \begin_inset space ~
46663 (EUC-KR) for Korean
46666 \begin_layout Description
46668 \begin_inset space ~
46672 \begin_inset space ~
46676 \begin_inset space ~
46679 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
46682 \begin_layout Description
46684 \begin_inset space ~
46688 \begin_inset space ~
46692 \begin_inset space ~
46695 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
46696 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
46697 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
46700 \begin_layout Description
46702 \begin_inset space ~
46706 \begin_inset space ~
46712 \begin_layout Description
46714 \begin_inset space ~
46718 \begin_inset space ~
46721 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
46722 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
46725 \begin_layout Description
46727 \begin_inset space ~
46731 \begin_inset space ~
46734 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46740 \begin_inset Index idx
46743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46750 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
46751 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596410
46753 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
46754 with the default encoding (
46756 Unicode (utf8) [default]
46762 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
46763 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46768 \begin_layout Description
46770 \begin_inset space ~
46778 \begin_inset space ~
46781 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
46788 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46791 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46798 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46799 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46801 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46804 \begin_layout Description
46806 \begin_inset space ~
46810 \begin_inset space ~
46813 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46819 \begin_inset Index idx
46822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46830 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596443
46833 including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
46835 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596475
46836 This used to be more comprehensive than
46839 \begin_inset space ~
46844 , but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
46849 \begin_layout Description
46851 \begin_inset space ~
46854 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46860 \begin_inset Index idx
46863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46865 packages ! inputenc
46872 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596266
46873 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
46875 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596400
46876 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
46877 with the default encoding (
46879 Unicode (utf8) [default]
46885 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
46886 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46891 \begin_layout Description
46893 \begin_inset space ~
46897 \begin_inset space ~
46901 \begin_inset space ~
46904 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
46905 \begin_inset space ~
46911 \begin_layout Description
46913 \begin_inset space ~
46917 \begin_inset space ~
46921 \begin_inset space ~
46924 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
46925 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
46926 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
46930 \begin_layout Description
46932 \begin_inset space ~
46936 \begin_inset space ~
46940 \begin_inset space ~
46943 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
46944 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
46947 \begin_layout Section
46949 \begin_inset Index idx
46952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46959 \begin_inset Index idx
46962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46969 \begin_inset Index idx
46972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46973 Color ! Shaded boxes
46979 \begin_inset Index idx
46982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46983 Color ! Greyed-out notes
46991 \begin_layout Standard
46992 Here you can alter the font color for the
46996 (default: black), for
46999 \begin_inset space ~
47004 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
47008 (default: white) and for
47011 \begin_inset space ~
47021 sets the color back to the default.
47024 \begin_layout Standard
47025 Clicking any button showing
47033 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
47034 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
47035 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
47036 later more quickly.
47039 \begin_layout Standard
47040 Note, if you change the
47043 \begin_inset space ~
47048 font color and use the option
47051 \begin_inset space ~
47056 in the document settings under
47059 \begin_inset space ~
47064 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
47065 \begin_inset space ~
47069 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47071 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
47078 \begin_layout Standard
47079 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
47085 \begin_layout Standard
47089 \begin_inset space ~
47098 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
47101 \begin_inset space ~
47104 Code after a forced page break:
47107 \begin_layout Itemize
47108 For the page color:
47109 \begin_inset Newline newline
47116 pagecolor{color name}
47119 \begin_layout Itemize
47120 For the text color:
47121 \begin_inset Newline newline
47131 \begin_layout Standard
47132 You are restricted to one of
47168 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
47175 \begin_inset space ~
47181 \begin_inset Newline newline
47184 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
47185 names to refer to them:
47188 \begin_layout Itemize
47194 \begin_inset Newline newline
47199 page_backgroundcolor
47202 \begin_layout Itemize
47206 \begin_inset space ~
47212 \begin_inset Newline newline
47220 \begin_layout Itemize
47224 \begin_inset space ~
47230 \begin_inset Newline newline
47238 \begin_layout Itemize
47242 \begin_inset space ~
47248 \begin_inset Newline newline
47256 \begin_layout Standard
47257 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
47260 \begin_inset space ~
47268 \begin_inset space ~
47276 \begin_layout Section
47278 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206827
47282 \begin_layout Standard
47284 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206929
47285 Here you can do some settings related to change tracking (see sec.
47286 \begin_inset space ~
47290 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47292 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47300 Alternatively to the menu or toolbar, you can set here whether changes
47301 are being tracked and whether they are shown in the output.
47304 \begin_layout Standard
47306 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
47307 Additionally, you can advise LyX to place a change bar in the margin of
47309 This might be useful to make changed passages more salient.
47312 \begin_layout Section
47316 \begin_layout Standard
47317 Here you can adjust the
47321 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
47325 as described in section
47326 \begin_inset space ~
47330 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47332 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
47337 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620045
47341 \begin_layout Standard
47343 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620379
47344 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox
47346 The functionality is handled by package lineno and and additional options
47347 of this package can be used as well.
47348 The most common one are:
47351 \begin_layout Description
47353 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620630
47354 right Line numbers to the right margin
47357 \begin_layout Description
47359 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620589
47360 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages, right – odd pages)
47364 \begin_layout Description
47366 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620637
47367 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
47370 \begin_layout Description
47372 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620780
47373 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
47376 \begin_layout Description
47378 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620792
47380 \begin_inset space ~
47383 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
47388 \begin_layout Section
47392 \begin_layout Standard
47393 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47399 \begin_inset Index idx
47402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47404 packages ! biblatex
47414 \begin_inset Index idx
47417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47429 \begin_inset Index idx
47432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47440 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47443 Sectioned bibliography
47445 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47451 \begin_inset Index idx
47454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47456 packages ! bibtopic
47466 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
47467 Finally, you can select a document-specific
47471 for the generation of the bibliography.
47472 For a further description of these possibilities see section
47473 \begin_inset space ~
47477 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47479 reference "sec:Bibliography"
47486 \begin_layout Section
47490 \begin_layout Standard
47491 Here you can define the
47495 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
47497 \begin_inset space ~
47501 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47503 reference "sec:Index"
47510 \begin_layout Section
47514 \begin_layout Standard
47515 The PDF properties are explained in section
47516 \begin_inset space ~
47520 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47522 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
47529 \begin_layout Section
47533 \begin_layout Standard
47534 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
47535 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47541 \begin_inset Index idx
47544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47556 \begin_inset Index idx
47559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47571 \begin_inset Index idx
47574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47586 \begin_inset Index idx
47589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47601 \begin_inset Index idx
47604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47606 packages ! mathdots
47616 \begin_inset Index idx
47619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47621 packages ! mathtools
47631 \begin_inset Index idx
47634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47646 \begin_inset Index idx
47649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47651 packages ! stackrel
47661 \begin_inset Index idx
47664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47666 packages ! stmaryrd
47676 \begin_inset Index idx
47679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47681 packages ! undertilde
47686 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
47689 \begin_layout Description
47690 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
47691 -errors in formulas,
47692 ensure that you have this enabled.
47695 \begin_layout Description
47696 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
47697 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
47698 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
47702 \begin_layout Description
47703 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
47706 \begin_inset space ~
47718 \begin_layout Description
47719 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
47722 \begin_inset space ~
47734 \begin_layout Description
47735 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
47746 \begin_layout Description
47747 mathtools is used for the math commands
47783 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
47790 \begin_layout Description
47791 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
47793 Chemical Symbols and Equations
47802 \begin_layout Description
47803 stackrel is used for the math command
47820 \begin_layout Description
47821 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
47824 \begin_layout Description
47825 undertilde is used for the math command
47833 Accents for one Character
47842 \begin_layout Section
47844 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
47846 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
47852 \begin_layout Standard
47854 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
47855 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
47858 \begin_layout Standard
47860 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
47861 The float placement options
47862 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
47865 are described in the section
47868 \begin_inset space ~
47872 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
47874 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
47882 \begin_inset space ~
47890 \begin_layout Section
47894 \begin_layout Standard
47895 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
47897 Program Code Listings
47902 \begin_inset space ~
47910 \begin_layout Section
47914 \begin_layout Standard
47915 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
47923 set to be used and set the
47928 The itemize environment is described in section
47929 \begin_inset space ~
47933 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47935 reference "sec:Itemize"
47942 \begin_layout Standard
47943 You can furthermore specify a
47946 \begin_inset space ~
47951 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47952 command of the desired character.
47953 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
47960 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
47962 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47966 \begin_inset space \space{}
47970 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
47980 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
47981 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
47984 \begin_layout Standard
47985 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47993 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47994 -packages in the preamble (menu
47997 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47998 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48001 \begin_inset space ~
48007 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
48011 usepackage{textcomp}
48014 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
48018 usepackage{amssymb}
48028 \begin_layout Section
48032 \begin_layout Standard
48033 Branches are described in section
48034 \begin_inset space ~
48038 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48040 reference "sec:Branches"
48047 \begin_layout Section
48049 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48051 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
48058 \begin_layout Standard
48059 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
48062 \begin_layout Description
48064 \begin_inset space ~
48068 \begin_inset space ~
48071 Format: The format that is used when you enter
48072 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48091 View Master Document
48092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48099 Update Master Document
48100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48107 menu or the toolbar.
48108 The default is set in
48110 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
48111 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
48113 \begin_inset space ~
48116 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
48120 \begin_inset space ~
48124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48126 reference "sec:File-Formats"
48133 \begin_layout Description
48135 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647276
48137 \begin_inset space ~
48141 \begin_inset space ~
48145 \begin_inset space ~
48148 programs If this is switched on, \SpecialChar LaTeX
48153 option which is needed with some packages.
48154 Note that this comes with security risks, so please use this only when
48155 really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
48158 \begin_layout Description
48160 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647006
48162 \begin_inset space ~
48166 \begin_inset space ~
48169 Options offers settings for the
48177 \begin_layout Itemize
48181 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646679
48183 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646679
48185 \begin_inset space ~
48191 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646686
48193 \begin_inset space ~
48197 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646686
48203 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646719
48205 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646729
48206 settings for the menu
48208 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
48212 \begin_inset space ~
48216 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646752
48219 and allows to customize the macro used in this process
48220 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646757
48225 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
48227 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646759
48229 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
48232 or a detailed description see section
48234 Reverse DVI/PDF search
48239 \begin_inset space ~
48245 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646762
48249 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647009
48253 \begin_layout Itemize
48255 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647929
48258 Put fragile content out of moving arguments
48260 determines whether so-called
48261 \begin_inset Quotes els
48265 \begin_inset Quotes ers
48269 constructs (such as labels or index entries) are placed outside of so-called
48271 \begin_inset Quotes els
48275 \begin_inset Quotes ers
48278 in \SpecialChar LaTeX
48279 (such as sections or captions), even if the corresponding insets are
48280 placed in such context in \SpecialChar LyX
48282 This setting is on by default, since it prevents nasty \SpecialChar LaTeX
48284 If you rely on labels or index entries being kept inside the problematic
48285 macros, you can uncheck this.
48286 If you don't know what we are talking about here, worry not: just leave
48293 \begin_layout Description
48295 \begin_inset space ~
48299 \begin_inset space ~
48302 Options offers settings for the export format
48310 \begin_inset space ~
48315 will assure that the output follows exactly version
48316 \begin_inset space ~
48319 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
48323 \begin_inset space ~
48328 settings are described in detail in section
48330 Math Output in XHTML
48335 \begin_inset space ~
48344 \begin_inset space ~
48348 \begin_inset space ~
48353 is used for the size of equations in the output.
48356 \begin_layout Description
48358 \begin_inset space ~
48363 Save transient properties
48365 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
48366 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
48367 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
48371 \begin_layout Itemize
48372 the activation of change tracking
48375 \begin_layout Itemize
48376 the output of tracked changes
48379 \begin_layout Itemize
48380 the recording of the document directory path.
48383 \begin_layout Standard
48384 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
48385 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
48389 \begin_layout Section
48397 \begin_layout Standard
48398 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
48400 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
48402 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
48404 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
48408 \begin_layout Standard
48409 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48410 -syntax is given in section
48411 \begin_inset space ~
48415 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48417 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
48424 \begin_layout Chapter
48430 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48432 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
48437 \begin_inset Index idx
48440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48449 \begin_layout Standard
48450 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
48452 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
48456 It has the following submenus.
48459 \begin_layout Section
48463 \begin_layout Subsection
48467 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48468 User Interface File
48469 \begin_inset Index idx
48472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48473 Customization ! of toolbars
48479 \begin_inset Index idx
48482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48483 Customization ! of menus
48491 \begin_layout Standard
48492 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
48493 interface (ui) file.
48494 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
48502 \begin_layout Description
48507 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
48510 \begin_layout Description
48517 the menu entries in popup context menus
48520 \begin_layout Description
48525 specifies the toolbar buttons
48528 \begin_layout Standard
48529 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
48530 and edit the entries.
48533 \begin_layout Standard
48534 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
48546 entries must be finished with an explicit
48571 and in the case of the
48572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48576 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48584 The syntax for the entries is:
48587 \begin_layout Standard
48588 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48617 \begin_layout Standard
48619 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48622 All the \SpecialChar LyX
48623 -functions are listed in the menu
48625 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
48627 \begin_inset space ~
48635 \begin_layout Standard
48636 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48642 \begin_layout Standard
48643 For example, assuming you use the menu
48645 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
48648 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
48652 \begin_layout Standard
48653 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48677 \begin_layout Standard
48679 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48694 to have the sixth bookmark.
48697 \begin_layout Standard
48701 \begin_inset space ~
48706 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
48707 's toolbar buttons.
48708 The currently available icon sets are compared in
48709 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48712 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
48720 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48724 \begin_layout Standard
48727 Enable tool tips in main work area
48729 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
48733 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48737 \begin_layout Standard
48742 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
48743 should display in the menu
48745 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48747 \begin_inset space ~
48755 \begin_layout Subsection
48759 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48763 \begin_layout Standard
48766 Restore window layouts and geometries
48769 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
48770 the last \SpecialChar LyX
48774 \begin_layout Standard
48777 Restore cursor positions
48779 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
48783 \begin_layout Standard
48786 Load opened files from last session
48788 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
48792 \begin_layout Standard
48795 Clear all session information
48797 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
48798 sessions (cursor positions, names
48799 of last opened documents, etc.).
48802 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48804 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48806 name "subsec:Backup documents"
48811 \begin_inset Index idx
48814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48823 \begin_layout Standard
48826 Backup original documents when saving
48828 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
48829 it was saved the last time.
48830 It is stored in the
48833 \begin_inset space ~
48839 \begin_inset space ~
48843 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48845 reference "sec:Paths"
48849 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
48852 \begin_inset space ~
48858 The backup file has the file extension
48859 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48867 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48873 \begin_layout Standard
48876 Backup documents, every
48878 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
48881 \begin_layout Standard
48884 Save documents compressed by default
48886 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
48887 \begin_inset space ~
48891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48893 reference "subsec:Compressed"
48898 This applies to newly created documents only.
48899 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
48902 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48903 Windows & work area
48906 \begin_layout Standard
48909 Open documents in tabs
48911 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
48915 \begin_layout Standard
48920 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
48925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48927 \begin_inset space ~
48931 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48933 reference "sec:Paths"
48937 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
48944 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
48945 documents will be opened in the same running instance
48946 of \SpecialChar LyX
48948 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
48949 instance is created for each file.
48952 \begin_layout Standard
48955 Single close-tab button
48957 is checked, there will only be one close button (
48967 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
48968 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
48969 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
48973 \begin_layout Standard
48974 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48982 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
48983 before the change takes effect.
48991 \begin_layout Standard
48996 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
48998 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
49000 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
49004 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
49005 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
49006 and only want to close the view in once instance.
49009 \begin_layout Subsection
49011 \begin_inset Index idx
49014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49021 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49023 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
49030 \begin_layout Standard
49031 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
49035 \begin_layout Standard
49036 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49044 This section only deals with the fonts
49048 the \SpecialChar LyX
49050 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
49053 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49054 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
49065 \begin_layout Standard
49066 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
49083 (depends on the system) as its
49086 \begin_inset space ~
49102 \begin_layout Standard
49103 You can change the font size with the
49110 \begin_layout Standard
49115 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
49117 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49120 points have the size of 1
49121 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49125 \begin_inset space ~
49129 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49131 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
49136 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
49137 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49141 The sizes are explained in detail in section
49142 \begin_inset space ~
49146 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49148 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
49155 \begin_layout Subsection
49157 \begin_inset Index idx
49160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49161 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
49168 \begin_inset Index idx
49171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49180 \begin_layout Standard
49181 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
49182 by choosing an item in the
49183 list and selecting the
49190 \begin_layout Standard
49191 By checking the option
49195 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
49198 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
49199 \begin_inset space ~
49203 \begin_inset space ~
49208 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
49211 \begin_layout Subsection
49213 \begin_inset Index idx
49216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49225 \begin_layout Standard
49226 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
49230 \begin_layout Standard
49235 enables previewing snippets of your document.
49236 This feature is described in section
49237 \begin_inset space ~
49241 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49243 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
49250 \begin_layout Standard
49251 Checking the option
49254 \begin_inset space ~
49258 \begin_inset space ~
49262 \begin_inset space ~
49267 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
49270 \begin_layout Section
49272 \begin_inset Index idx
49275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49284 \begin_layout Subsection
49288 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49292 \begin_layout Standard
49295 Cursor follows scrollbar
49297 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
49301 \begin_layout Standard
49302 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
49303 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
49304 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
49307 \begin_layout Standard
49310 Scroll below end of document
49312 is self-explanatory.
49315 \begin_layout Standard
49316 In \SpecialChar LyX
49317 one can jump from word to word by pressing
49324 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
49326 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
49327 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
49328 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924606
49332 \begin_layout Standard
49334 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924785
49337 Keep change tracking markup on copy and paste
49339 is for users who don't want tracked changes to be dissolved on copy and
49340 paste operations (i.
49341 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49344 e., inserted as new text with the deletions removed).
49345 If this is checked, the change-tracked text will be copied and pasted as
49346 is, independent if changes are currently tracked or not.
49347 This also applies to wrapping to\SpecialChar breakableslash
49348 dissolving from insets.
49353 \begin_layout Standard
49356 Sort environments alphabetically
49358 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
49361 \begin_layout Standard
49364 Group environments by their category
49366 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
49369 \begin_layout Standard
49374 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
49385 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49389 \begin_layout Standard
49390 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
49395 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
49396 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
49400 \begin_layout Subsection
49402 \begin_inset Index idx
49405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49412 \begin_inset Index idx
49415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49416 Settings ! Shortcuts
49424 \begin_layout Standard
49429 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
49431 Several binding files are available, among them:
49434 \begin_layout Description
49435 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
49438 \begin_layout Description
49439 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
49451 \begin_layout Description
49452 mac.bind a set of bindings for
49455 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49463 \begin_layout Standard
49464 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
49469 , and binding files for special languages.
49470 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
49471 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49475 \begin_inset space \space{}
49479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49487 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
49488 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
49489 will try to use the appropriate binding
49493 \begin_layout Standard
49494 Some binding files, like
49498 , only have a limited scope.
49499 When looking at the end of the file
49503 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
49506 \begin_layout Standard
49510 \begin_inset space ~
49514 \begin_inset space ~
49519 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
49520 in the selected key binding file.
49523 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49525 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49527 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
49532 \begin_inset Index idx
49535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49536 Key Bindings ! Editing
49544 \begin_layout Standard
49545 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
49546 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
49547 functions and the bound shortcuts.
49548 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
49551 Show key-bindings containing
49554 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
49555 Insert there for example as keyword
49556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49563 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
49564 functions that contain
49565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49573 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
49574 All \SpecialChar LyX
49575 functions are also listed in the file
49580 that you will find in the
49587 \begin_layout Standard
49588 For example, to add the shortcut
49596 , select the function and press the
49601 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
49602 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
49605 \begin_layout Standard
49606 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
49607 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
49609 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
49610 function names as a semicolon separated list.
49612 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
49617 \begin_layout Standard
49618 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
49621 \begin_layout Standard
49622 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
49624 The syntax of the entries is:
49627 \begin_layout Standard
49633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49652 \begin_layout Standard
49653 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
49654 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
49655 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49682 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
49683 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
49684 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
49685 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
49687 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
49691 , you needed to specify it as
49696 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
49699 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
49702 \begin_layout Subsection
49704 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49706 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
49711 \begin_inset Index idx
49714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49721 \begin_inset Index idx
49724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49725 Settings ! Keyboard Map
49733 \begin_layout Standard
49734 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
49735 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
49736 provides keyboard maps.
49737 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
49738 is a Romanian one, you can enable
49741 \begin_inset space ~
49745 \begin_inset space ~
49750 and select the keyboard map file named
49757 \begin_layout Standard
49766 keyboard map and, if you use the
49770 bindings, you can select the first and second with
49773 arg "keymap-primary"
49779 arg "keymap-secondary"
49782 respectively or toggle between them with
49785 arg "keymap-toggle"
49791 \begin_layout Standard
49792 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49800 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
49809 \begin_layout Standard
49810 You can also specify the mouse
49812 Wheel scrolling speed
49815 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
49819 Middle mouse button pasting
49821 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
49822 inserts the content of the clipboard.
49825 \begin_layout Standard
49833 \begin_inset space ~
49837 \begin_inset space ~
49842 you can select a key for zooming.
49843 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
49846 \begin_layout Subsection
49850 \begin_layout Standard
49851 Input completion is described in section
49852 \begin_inset space ~
49856 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49858 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
49865 \begin_layout Section
49867 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49874 \begin_inset Index idx
49877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49884 \begin_inset Index idx
49887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49896 \begin_layout Standard
49897 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
49898 are normally determined during
49900 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
49903 \begin_layout Description
49905 \begin_inset space ~
49908 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
49909 's working directory.
49910 It is the default when you
49921 \begin_inset space ~
49929 \begin_layout Description
49931 \begin_inset space ~
49934 templates This directory
49935 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
49936 contains the templates that are shown
49937 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
49938 will be opened when you use the menu
49939 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
49944 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49946 \begin_inset space ~
49950 \begin_inset space ~
49958 \begin_layout Description
49960 \begin_inset space ~
49963 files This directory
49964 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
49965 will be opened when you use the
49966 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
49967 contains the example files that are listed in
49970 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
49979 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49981 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
49983 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
49989 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
49991 \begin_inset Newline newline
49995 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50007 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
50008 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
50018 \begin_layout Description
50020 \begin_inset space ~
50024 \begin_inset Index idx
50027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50033 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
50034 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
50035 \begin_inset space ~
50039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50041 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
50049 will be used to save the backups.
50050 \begin_inset Newline newline
50053 Backup files have the ending
50054 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50058 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50064 \begin_layout Description
50066 \begin_inset space ~
50069 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
50070 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
50072 \begin_inset Newline newline
50079 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50085 You can edit this file with the program
50094 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
50095 in its preferences under
50098 \begin_inset space ~
50104 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
50109 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
50111 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
50112 in your \SpecialChar LyX
50118 and \SpecialChar LyX
50119 need to be running the same time.
50120 \begin_inset Newline newline
50123 The pipe is also used for the
50127 feature, see section
50128 \begin_inset space ~
50132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50134 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
50139 \begin_inset Newline newline
50142 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
50143 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
50144 \begin_inset Newline newline
50160 \begin_layout Description
50162 \begin_inset space ~
50165 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
50168 \begin_layout Description
50170 \begin_inset space ~
50173 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
50174 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
50175 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
50178 \begin_layout Description
50180 \begin_inset space ~
50183 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
50189 You only need to specify it if you are using
50193 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
50195 For \SpecialChar LyX
50200 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
50204 \begin_layout Description
50206 \begin_inset space ~
50209 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
50210 When \SpecialChar LyX
50211 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
50212 to find it on the system.
50213 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
50215 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
50217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50221 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50224 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
50225 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
50228 \begin_layout Description
50230 \begin_inset space ~
50233 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
50234 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
50235 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
50236 code or in the document
50238 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
50240 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
50241 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
50242 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
50243 scanned for the input files.
50244 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
50245 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
50247 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
50248 compilation may fail for some documents.
50251 \begin_layout Section
50255 \begin_layout Standard
50256 Here you can insert your
50265 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
50267 \begin_inset space ~
50271 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50273 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
50277 , to mark changes you make as yours.
50280 \begin_layout Section
50282 \begin_inset Index idx
50285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50286 Language ! Settings
50292 \begin_inset Index idx
50295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50296 Settings ! Language
50304 \begin_layout Subsection
50306 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50308 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
50315 \begin_layout Description
50317 \begin_inset space ~
50321 \begin_inset space ~
50324 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
50326 You can find its actual translation status here:
50327 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50329 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
50335 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708959
50339 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50341 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708986
50342 LaTeX Language Support
50347 \begin_layout Description
50349 \begin_inset space ~
50352 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
50353 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
50354 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
50355 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
50356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50372 The most widespread language package is
50377 \begin_inset Index idx
50380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50387 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
50389 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
50390 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
50391 come with the alternative
50397 \begin_inset Index idx
50400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50402 packages ! polyglossia
50407 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
50408 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
50414 The available selections are described in section
50415 \begin_inset space ~
50419 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50421 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
50428 \begin_layout Description
50430 \begin_inset space ~
50434 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708374
50435 If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
50436 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
50438 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708374
50442 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708377
50446 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708382
50448 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708384
50452 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708639
50453 that is used to switch to a different language
50454 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708410
50455 to start the package
50459 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708611
50460 This might be useful if you want to use a different command with
50464 (which provides several alternative commands with different behavior),
50465 or if you use a custom language package with specific commands, such as
50468 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
50472 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
50480 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708616
50488 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708621
50491 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
50493 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
50497 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
50515 selectlanguage{$$lang}
50516 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
50523 is a placeholder that is substituted with the respective language name
50524 in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50529 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
50534 , this setting is ignored.
50539 \begin_layout Description
50541 \begin_inset space ~
50545 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857836
50552 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857869
50553 Use this if the language switch set in
50557 needs to be explicitly ended, as in
50561 's alternative command
50565 begin{otherlanguage*}\SpecialChar ldots
50566 \SpecialChar allowbreak
50569 end{otherlanguage*}
50573 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708866
50574 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
50575 command toggles the package on and off
50576 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858041
50577 Empty by default, as
50581 selectlanguage{$$lang}
50583 does not need to be explicitly ended (the switch remains valid until the
50588 selectlanguage{$$lang}
50594 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857868
50599 , this setting is ignored.
50604 \begin_layout Description
50606 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
50608 \begin_inset space ~
50612 \begin_inset space ~
50615 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
50619 \begin_layout Description
50621 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
50623 \begin_inset space ~
50627 \begin_inset space ~
50630 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
50636 \begin_layout Description
50638 \begin_inset space ~
50642 \begin_inset space ~
50646 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709051
50648 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709052
50651 this option is set, the languages used in the document will be added
50652 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709127
50655 to the document class options
50656 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709259
50657 rather than the language package options.
50658 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709186
50662 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709191
50663 so that they can be used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
50665 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709305
50666 Since the document class passes all options in gets to all loaded \SpecialChar LaTeX
50668 all language-aware packages will be informed about the used languages this
50673 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709264
50674 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
50683 \begin_layout Description
50685 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709314
50687 \begin_inset space ~
50691 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709328
50693 \begin_inset space ~
50697 \begin_inset space ~
50701 \begin_inset space ~
50707 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709331
50709 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709331
50712 this option is set,
50713 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709808
50714 the language switch defined in
50717 \begin_inset space ~
50722 is output at the beginning of the document, thereby explicitly switching
50723 to the document language.
50724 This assures that the correct language is used in any case.
50725 This might be needed if you use a non-default
50728 \begin_inset space ~
50733 or if a package resets the document language.
50734 If not set, the language that is active at document start is used (this
50735 usually should be the document language).
50736 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709548
50737 documents start with the chosen document language.
50738 When this option is not set, the
50741 \begin_inset space ~
50746 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50748 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
50751 \begin_inset space ~
50761 \begin_layout Description
50763 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709354
50765 \begin_inset space ~
50769 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709358
50771 \begin_inset space ~
50775 \begin_inset space ~
50779 \begin_inset space ~
50785 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709361
50789 \begin_inset space ~
50793 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709392
50794 Set document language explicitly
50800 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709618
50802 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709618
50808 \begin_inset space ~
50814 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709625
50816 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709626
50820 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709628
50822 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709628
50825 the end of the document.
50826 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709816
50830 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50831 \paragraph_spacing single
50833 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709833
50839 \begin_layout Description
50841 \begin_inset space ~
50845 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709847
50847 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709845
50851 \begin_inset space ~
50855 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709877
50857 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709877
50859 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709878
50863 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709882
50866 in a language different
50867 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709886
50869 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709886
50872 the document language will be
50873 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709907
50874 marked (by default with a blue
50877 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709911
50879 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709911
50883 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709927
50887 \begin_layout Description
50889 \change_inserted -712698321 1563711969
50891 \begin_inset space ~
50895 \begin_inset space ~
50899 \begin_inset space ~
50902 language If set, \SpecialChar LyX
50903 will switch the input language if the keyboard map is
50904 switched via the operating system.
50905 This is particularly useful if you switch between languages with different
50907 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50910 g., English and Hebrew: in this case, switching the keyboard to Hebrew will
50911 automatically switch the input language to Hebrew as well, and vice versa).
50916 \begin_layout Description
50918 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709926
50920 \begin_inset space ~
50924 \begin_inset space ~
50927 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
50928 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
50933 \begin_layout Description
50935 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
50937 \begin_inset space ~
50941 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710132
50943 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
50947 \begin_inset space ~
50951 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710265
50952 Here you can define how cursor movement (with the arrow keys) behaves
50953 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710266
50955 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710267
50959 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710171
50961 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710286
50962 scripts with right-to-left direction (e.g., Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi).
50964 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
50965 , you can define if the left and right arrow keys move the cursor visually
50966 to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
50968 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859701
50973 \begin_layout Standard
50978 means that the cursor
50979 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859940
50980 follows the logic of the text direction, and the arrows' direction relates
50981 to the directionality of the main paragraph language.
50983 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50986 g., in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph (say, Hebrew
50987 embedded in English), the cursor starts at the right (that is, at the
50991 of the embedded passage in the right-to-left logic) when coming from the
50993 The meaning of the key is thus swapped for that part; right arrow in this
50994 specific case always means: move
50998 in text (even if this means:
51004 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
51005 is moved to the left when pressing the right arrow key
51006 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859705
51007 This setting might be useful in texts that mix left-to-right and right-to-left
51008 scripts, since the cursor then follows a coherent
51009 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51020 \begin_layout Standard
51022 \change_inserted -712698321 1563860084
51027 means: always move to the direction towards which the arrows really point.
51028 In this case, in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph,
51029 the cursor starts at the left (in the text logic:
51033 ) when coming from the left.
51034 The visual meaning of the key is thus maintained in all cases, at the expense
51036 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
51037 and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
51038 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858627
51043 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51045 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710235
51049 \begin_layout Description
51051 \change_inserted -712698321 1563776004
51053 \begin_inset space ~
51057 \begin_inset space ~
51060 separator Defines the default decimal separator for use in tables (decimal
51061 separator alignment).
51062 By default, the appropriate character for the current language is selected
51064 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51067 g., dot for English, comma for German), but you can also specify a specific
51068 (static) custom character here.
51071 \begin_layout Description
51073 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709001
51075 \begin_inset space ~
51079 \begin_inset space ~
51082 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
51088 \begin_layout Subsection
51092 \begin_layout Standard
51093 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
51094 \begin_inset space ~
51098 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51100 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
51107 \begin_layout Section
51111 \begin_layout Subsection
51113 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51115 name "subsec:General-output"
51122 \begin_layout Description
51124 \begin_inset space ~
51127 search Commands that will be used for the menu
51129 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
51131 \begin_inset space ~
51137 For a detailed description see section
51139 Reverse DVI/PDF search
51144 \begin_inset space ~
51152 \begin_layout Description
51154 \begin_inset space ~
51157 Options Options for the program
51161 that is used for the export format
51166 \begin_inset space ~
51170 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51172 reference "subsec:Export"
51177 Possible options are listed in the
51182 \begin_inset Newline newline
51186 \begin_inset Flex URL
51189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51191 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
51201 \begin_layout Description
51203 \begin_inset space ~
51207 \begin_inset space ~
51210 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
51213 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
51214 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
51216 \begin_inset space ~
51222 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
51225 \begin_layout Description
51227 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
51229 \begin_inset space ~
51233 \begin_inset Index idx
51236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51243 \begin_inset Index idx
51246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51247 Settings ! Date format
51252 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
51253 \begin_inset Newline newline
51257 \begin_inset Flex URL
51260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51262 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
51268 \begin_inset Newline newline
51271 For example the format
51272 \begin_inset Newline newline
51276 \begin_inset Newline newline
51279 prints the date as day/month/year.
51284 \begin_layout Description
51286 \begin_inset space ~
51290 \begin_inset space ~
51293 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
51294 is allowed to overwrite on export.
51297 \begin_layout Subsection
51303 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51305 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
51310 \begin_inset Index idx
51313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51314 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
51323 \begin_layout Description
51325 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
51327 \begin_inset space ~
51335 \begin_inset space ~
51339 \begin_inset space ~
51342 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
51347 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
51368 are used for Cyrillic.
51369 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
51370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51382 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
51384 sets up in the background.
51385 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
51390 \begin_layout Description
51392 \begin_inset space ~
51396 \begin_inset space ~
51400 \begin_inset space ~
51404 \begin_inset space ~
51407 options They only have an effect when the program
51411 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
51414 \begin_layout Standard
51415 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
51416 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
51417 manuals of the applications.
51420 \begin_layout Description
51422 \begin_inset space ~
51425 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
51426 \begin_inset space ~
51430 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51432 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
51439 \begin_layout Description
51441 \begin_inset space ~
51444 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
51445 \begin_inset space ~
51449 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51451 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
51458 \begin_layout Description
51460 \begin_inset space ~
51463 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
51464 \begin_inset space ~
51468 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51470 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
51477 \begin_layout Description
51483 \begin_inset space ~
51486 command Command for the program
51488 Check\SpecialChar TeX
51491 that is described in the section
51493 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
51498 Additional Features
51503 \begin_layout Standard
51504 There are additionally the following options:
51507 \begin_layout Description
51509 \begin_inset space ~
51513 \begin_inset space ~
51517 \begin_inset space ~
51521 \begin_inset space ~
51526 \begin_inset space ~
51529 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
51530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51540 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51547 to separate folders.
51548 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
51550 \begin_inset Index idx
51553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51560 \begin_inset Index idx
51563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51572 \begin_layout Description
51574 \begin_inset space ~
51578 \begin_inset space ~
51582 \begin_inset space ~
51586 \begin_inset space ~
51590 \begin_inset space ~
51594 \begin_inset space ~
51597 changes Removes all manually set
51603 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51604 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
51606 \begin_inset space ~
51611 dialog when changing the document class.
51614 \begin_layout Section
51616 \begin_inset space ~
51620 \begin_inset Index idx
51623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51632 \begin_layout Subsection
51634 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51636 name "subsec:Converters"
51641 \begin_inset Index idx
51644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51653 \begin_layout Standard
51654 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
51655 from one format to another.
51656 You can modify converters or create new ones.
51657 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
51664 \begin_inset space ~
51669 field and press the
51674 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
51678 \begin_inset space ~
51683 drop-down list, modify the
51687 field and press the
51694 \begin_layout Standard
51697 Converter File Cache
51703 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
51705 Maximum Age (in days
51708 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
51709 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
51712 \begin_layout Standard
51713 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
51714 definition, is described in the section
51725 \begin_layout Subsection
51727 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51729 name "sec:File-Formats"
51734 \begin_inset Index idx
51737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51744 \begin_inset Index idx
51747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51756 \begin_layout Standard
51757 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
51767 programs that should be used for certain formats.
51770 \begin_layout Standard
51771 You can also define the
51773 Default output format
51775 that is used when you use
51777 View, Update, View Master Document
51781 Update Master Document
51787 menu or the toolbar.
51790 \begin_layout Standard
51791 More about formats and their options is described in the section
51802 \begin_layout Standard
51803 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
51805 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
51806 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
51807 This is done by specifying a
51812 More about this is described in the section
51823 \begin_layout Chapter
51824 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
51826 \begin_inset Index idx
51829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51836 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51838 name "chap:Units-available-in"
51845 \begin_layout Standard
51847 \begin_inset space ~
51851 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51853 reference "tab:Units"
51857 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
51858 and used in this documentation.
51861 \begin_layout Standard
51862 \begin_inset Float table
51869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51870 \begin_inset Caption Standard
51872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51873 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51888 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
51894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51896 \begin_inset Tabular
51897 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
51898 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
51899 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
51900 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
51901 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
51903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51947 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51951 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51984 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51988 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52050 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52054 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
52058 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52215 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52219 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52252 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52256 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52289 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52293 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52325 scaled point (65536
52326 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52330 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52393 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
52398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52517 % of original image width
52522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52606 \begin_layout Standard
52607 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
52610 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
52617 \begin_layout Bibliography
52618 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52619 LatexCommand bibitem
52626 The \SpecialChar LyX
52628 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52631 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
52637 \begin_inset Newline newline
52641 \begin_inset Flex URL
52644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52646 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
52654 \begin_layout Bibliography
52655 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52656 LatexCommand bibitem
52657 key "latexcompanion"
52662 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
52664 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
52665 Companion Second Edition.
52668 Addison-Wesley, 2004
52671 \begin_layout Bibliography
52672 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52673 LatexCommand bibitem
52679 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
52682 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
52686 Addison-Wesley, 2003
52689 \begin_layout Bibliography
52690 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52691 LatexCommand bibitem
52700 : A Document Preparation System.
52703 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
52706 \begin_layout Bibliography
52707 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52708 LatexCommand bibitem
52718 The \SpecialChar TeX
52722 Addison-Wesley, 1984
52725 \begin_layout Bibliography
52726 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52727 LatexCommand bibitem
52733 The \SpecialChar TeX
52735 \begin_inset Newline newline
52739 \begin_inset Flex URL
52742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52744 https://ctan.org/topic
52752 \begin_layout Bibliography
52753 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52754 LatexCommand bibitem
52760 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
52762 \begin_inset Newline newline
52766 \begin_inset Flex URL
52769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52771 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
52779 \begin_layout Bibliography
52780 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52781 LatexCommand bibitem
52788 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52790 name "Documentation"
52791 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
52798 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
52802 \begin_inset Newline newline
52806 \begin_inset Flex URL
52809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52811 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
52819 \begin_layout Bibliography
52820 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52821 LatexCommand bibitem
52828 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52830 name "Documentation"
52831 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
52836 how to use the program
52838 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
52842 \begin_inset Newline newline
52846 \begin_inset Flex URL
52849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52851 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
52859 \begin_layout Bibliography
52860 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52861 LatexCommand bibitem
52868 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52870 name "Documentation"
52871 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
52876 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52882 \begin_inset Index idx
52885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52887 packages ! biblatex
52893 \begin_inset Newline newline
52897 \begin_inset Flex URL
52900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52902 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
52910 \begin_layout Bibliography
52911 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52912 LatexCommand bibitem
52919 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52921 name "Documentation"
52922 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
52927 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52933 \begin_inset Index idx
52936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52944 \begin_inset Newline newline
52948 \begin_inset Flex URL
52951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52953 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
52961 \begin_layout Bibliography
52962 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52963 LatexCommand bibitem
52970 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52972 name "Documentation"
52973 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
52983 \begin_inset Newline newline
52987 \begin_inset Flex URL
52990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52992 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
53000 \begin_layout Bibliography
53001 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53002 LatexCommand bibitem
53003 key "makeindex-man"
53009 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53012 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
53022 \begin_inset Newline newline
53026 \begin_inset Flex URL
53029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53031 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
53039 \begin_layout Bibliography
53040 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53041 LatexCommand bibitem
53048 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53050 name "Documentation"
53051 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
53061 \begin_inset Newline newline
53065 \begin_inset Flex URL
53068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53070 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
53078 \begin_layout Bibliography
53079 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53080 LatexCommand bibitem
53087 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53089 name "Documentation"
53090 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
53095 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
53097 \begin_inset Newline newline
53101 \begin_inset Flex URL
53104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53106 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
53114 \begin_layout Bibliography
53115 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53116 LatexCommand bibitem
53123 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53125 name "Documentation"
53126 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
53131 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53137 \begin_inset Index idx
53140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53148 \begin_inset Newline newline
53152 \begin_inset Flex URL
53155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53157 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
53165 \begin_layout Bibliography
53166 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53167 LatexCommand bibitem
53174 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53176 name "Documentation"
53177 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
53182 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53188 \begin_inset Index idx
53191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53193 packages ! enumitem
53199 \begin_inset Newline newline
53203 \begin_inset Flex URL
53206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53208 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
53216 \begin_layout Bibliography
53217 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53218 LatexCommand bibitem
53225 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53227 name "Documentation"
53228 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
53233 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53239 \begin_inset Index idx
53242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53244 packages ! fancyhdr
53250 \begin_inset Newline newline
53254 \begin_inset Flex URL
53257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53259 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
53267 \begin_layout Bibliography
53268 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53269 LatexCommand bibitem
53276 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53278 name "Documentation"
53279 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
53284 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53290 \begin_inset Index idx
53293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53295 packages ! hyperref
53301 \begin_inset Newline newline
53305 \begin_inset Flex URL
53308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53310 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
53318 \begin_layout Bibliography
53319 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53320 LatexCommand bibitem
53327 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53329 name "Documentation"
53330 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
53335 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53341 \begin_inset Index idx
53344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53346 packages ! microtype
53352 \begin_inset Newline newline
53356 \begin_inset Flex URL
53359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53361 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
53369 \begin_layout Bibliography
53370 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53371 LatexCommand bibitem
53378 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53380 name "Documentation"
53381 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
53386 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53392 \begin_inset Index idx
53395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53403 \begin_inset Newline newline
53407 \begin_inset Flex URL
53410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53412 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
53420 \begin_layout Bibliography
53421 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53422 LatexCommand bibitem
53429 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53431 name "Documentation"
53432 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
53437 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53443 \begin_inset Index idx
53446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53448 packages ! prettyref
53454 \begin_inset Newline newline
53458 \begin_inset Flex URL
53461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53463 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
53471 \begin_layout Bibliography
53472 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53473 LatexCommand bibitem
53480 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53482 name "Documentation"
53483 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
53488 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53494 \begin_inset Index idx
53497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53499 packages ! refstyle
53505 \begin_inset Newline newline
53509 \begin_inset Flex URL
53512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53514 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
53522 \begin_layout Bibliography
53523 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53524 LatexCommand bibitem
53531 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53534 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
53539 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53541 \begin_inset Newline newline
53545 \begin_inset Flex URL
53548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53550 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
53558 \begin_layout Bibliography
53559 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53560 LatexCommand bibitem
53567 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53570 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
53575 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53577 \begin_inset Newline newline
53581 \begin_inset Flex URL
53584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53586 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
53594 \begin_layout Bibliography
53595 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53596 LatexCommand bibitem
53603 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53606 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
53611 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53612 for Cyrillic languages:
53613 \begin_inset Newline newline
53617 \begin_inset Flex URL
53620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53622 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
53630 \begin_layout Bibliography
53631 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53632 LatexCommand bibitem
53639 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53642 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
53647 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53649 \begin_inset Newline newline
53653 \begin_inset Flex URL
53656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53658 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
53666 \begin_layout Bibliography
53667 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53668 LatexCommand bibitem
53675 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53678 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
53683 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53685 \begin_inset Newline newline
53689 \begin_inset Flex URL
53692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53694 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
53702 \begin_layout Bibliography
53703 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53704 LatexCommand bibitem
53711 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53714 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
53719 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53721 \begin_inset Newline newline
53725 \begin_inset Flex URL
53728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53730 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
53738 \begin_layout Standard
53739 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
53746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53773 \begin_inset Note Note
53776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53783 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
53784 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
53785 bibliography is the second one:
53793 \begin_layout Standard
53794 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
53795 LatexCommand bibtex
53796 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
53797 options "biblio/alphadin"
53804 \begin_layout Standard
53805 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
53809 \begin_layout Standard
53813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53819 pagedeclaration}[1]{
53822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53828 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
53836 \begin_inset Note Note
53839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53840 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
53841 \begin_inset space ~
53845 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53847 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
53859 \begin_layout Standard
53860 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
53861 LatexCommand printnomenclature
53867 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
53868 LatexCommand printindex